Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Server

EVS7124D-V2 - Server Dahua Technology - Free user manual and instructions

Find the device manual for free EVS7124D-V2 Dahua Technology in PDF.

📄 287 pages English EN Download 💬 AI Question 10 questions ⚙️ Specs
Notice Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - page 2
Pick your language and provide your email: we'll send you a specifically translated version.
Product Type Embedded Video Storage Server
Model EVS7124D-V2
Brand Dahua Technology
Operating System Linux
HDD Bays 24 (supports up to 24 hard drives)
RAID Levels RAID 0, 1, 5, 6, 10, 50, 60, SRAID, JRAID
AI Functions Face Detection, Face Recognition, People Counting, Vehicle Recognition, IVS, Video Metadata
Network Ports Multiple Gigabit Ethernet ports (management and data)
Video Output HDMI
Power Supply Dual redundant power modules (estimated 800W each)
Dimensions (Approx.) 2U rackmount: 88 x 482 x 600 mm (H x W x D)
Weight (Approx.) 25 kg (without hard drives)
Operating Temperature 0 °C to 45 °C (32 °F to 113 °F)
Operating Humidity Allowed humidity conditions (check manual for details)
Certification Class A product
Maintenance Hot-swappable HDDs, firmware upgrade via web/PCAPP
Safety Features Protective earthing, surge protection, password protection, account lock
Spare Parts / Repairability Hard drives, power modules, AI modules (if applicable); professional repair required
General Information Dual-controller design, supports PCAPP and web interface, network storage (NFS, SMB, FTP)

Frequently Asked Questions - EVS7124D-V2 Dahua Technology

How do I initialize the EVS7124D-V2 for the first time?
Connect to the device via web browser using the default IP (192.168.1.108). Follow the on-screen wizard to set language, time, admin password, and password protection (email). Click Finish to complete initialization.
How can I add remote cameras (IP cameras) to the device?
Go to Device Management > Add. You can use Smart Add to search for cameras on the same network, Manual Add to enter IP/details, or Batch Add via CSV template. For smart add, click Start Search, select the camera, enter credentials, and click Add.
What RAID levels are supported and how do I configure RAID?
Supports RAID 0, 1, 5, 6, 10, 50, 60, SRAID, and JRAID. To configure, go to Storage Management > RAID. Select the physical disks, choose a RAID level, and create the array. A minimum number of disks is required (e.g., 2 for RAID 1, 3 for RAID 5).
How do I set up face detection?
First, enable the AI Plan for the camera under Event > AI Plan. Then go to AI Plan > Face Detection, enable it, set detection region, deployment time, and alarm actions. Save the configuration. View results on the LIVE page with the Face tab.
I forgot the admin password. How can I reset it?
On the login page, click Forgot password. If you set an email during initialization, a reset link will be sent to that email. Alternatively, use password protection questions if configured. If neither is set, contact Dahua support for assistance.
How do I update the firmware?
Download the latest firmware from Dahua's website. Log in to the web interface or PCAPP, go to System Maintenance > Device Maintenance > Upgrade. Select the firmware file and click Upgrade. Do not power off during the process.
How do I configure network settings like IP address?
After initialization, go to System Configuration > Network Management. Select the NIC, set IP type (IPv4/IPv6), choose static or DHCP, enter IP, subnet mask, gateway, and DNS. You can also enable virtual IP for dual-controller redundancy.
How can I view live video from connected cameras?
Use the PCAPP client (download from web interface) or the web interface. On PCAPP, the LIVE page shows added cameras. Select a view group to display multiple cameras. You can also enable AI overlays and features panels.
How do I set up alarm actions (e.g., email, buzzer) when an event occurs?
Go to Event Management > Alarm Actions. Create a new action, select trigger events (e.g., motion detection, face detection), and choose actions like sending email, activating buzzer, recording, or snapshot. Apply the action to the relevant cameras.
What is the PCAPP client and how do I use it?
PCAPP is a dedicated Windows client for managing the device. Download it from the web interface (click Download PCAPP). Install and run it. Log in with the device IP, username, and password. It provides live view, playback, configuration, and AI features.

User questions about EVS7124D-V2 Dahua Technology

0 question about this device. Answer the ones you know or ask your own.

Ask a new question about this device

The email remains private: it is only used to notify you if someone responds to your question.

No questions yet. Be the first to ask one.

Download the instructions for your Server in PDF format for free! Find your manual EVS7124D-V2 - Dahua Technology and take your electronic device back in hand. On this page are published all the documents necessary for the use of your device. EVS7124D-V2 by Dahua Technology.

USER MANUAL EVS7124D-V2 Dahua Technology

Embedded Video Storage

User's Manual

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - User's Manual - 1

natural_image Abstract geometric composition with gray and red color blocks (no text or symbols)

Foreword

General

This manual introduces the functions and operations of the embedded video storage server (hereinafter referred to as "the Device"). Read carefully before using the device, and keep the manual safe for future reference.

Models

EVS7124D; EVS7148D

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Models - 1

In the name EVS71XXD, XX refers to HDD number (24, or 48); D indicates that the Device is dual-controller type.

Safety Instructions

The following signal words might appear in the manual.

Signal Words Meaning
Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Safety Instructions - 1DANGERIndicates a high potential hazard which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Safety Instructions - 2WARNINGIndicates a medium or low potential hazard which, if not avoided, could result in slight or moderate injury.
Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Safety Instructions - 3CAUTIONIndicates a potential risk which, if not avoided, could result in property damage, data loss, reductions in performance, or unpredictable results.
Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Safety Instructions - 4TIPSProvides methods to help you solve a problem or save time.
Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Safety Instructions - 5NOTEProvides additional information as a supplement to the text.

Privacy Protection Notice

As the device user or data controller, you might collect the personal data of others such as their face, fingerprints, and license plate number. You need to be in compliance with your local privacy protection laws and regulations to protect the legitimate rights and interests of other people by implementing measures which include but are not limited: Providing clear and visible identification to inform people of the existence of the surveillance area and provide required contact information.

Revision History

Version Revision Content Release Time
V2.0.1Added virtual IP.May 2022
V2.0.0Added the functions such as one-click disarming, voice talk, and SSD health detection.May 2022
V1.0.0First release.September 2020

About the Manual

  • The manual is for reference only. Slight differences might be found between the manual and the product.
  • We are not liable for losses incurred due to operating the product in ways that are not in compliance with the manual.
  • The manual will be updated according to the latest laws and regulations of related jurisdictions. For detailed information, see the paper user's manual, use our CD-ROM, scan the QR code or visit our official website. The manual is for reference only. Slight differences might be found between the electronic version and the paper version.
  • All designs and software are subject to change without prior written notice. Product updates might result in some differences appearing between the actual product and the manual. Please contact customer service for the latest program and supplementary documentation.
  • There might be errors in the print or deviations in the description of the functions, operations and technical data. If there is any doubt or dispute, we reserve the right of final explanation.
  • Upgrade the reader software or try other mainstream reader software if the manual (in PDF format) cannot be opened.
  • All trademarks, registered trademarks and company names in the manual are properties of their respective owners.
  • Please visit our website, contact the supplier or customer service if any problems occur while using the Device.
  • If there is any uncertainty or controversy, we reserve the right of final explanation.

Important Safeguards and Warnings

This section introduces content covering the proper handling of the device, hazard prevention, and prevention of property damage. Read carefully before using the device, and comply with the guidelines when using it.

Operation Requirements

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Operation Requirements - 1

WARNING

  • This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this may cause radio interference in which case you may be required to take adequate measures.
  • The device is heavy and needs to be carried by several persons together to avoid personal injuries.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - WARNING - 1

  • Check whether the power supply is correct before use.
  • Do not unplug the power cord on the side of the device while the adapter is powered on.
  • Operate the device within the rated range of power input and output.
  • Use the device under allowed humidity and temperature conditions.
  • Do not drip or splash liquid onto the device, make sure that there is no object filled with liquid on the device to prevent liquid from flowing into it.
  • Do not disassemble the Device.
  • The device can only be used with batteries possessing internal protection.
  • Your configurations will be lost after performing a factory reset. Please be advised.
  • Do not restart, shut down or disconnect the power to the device during an update.
  • Make sure the update file is correct because an incorrect file can result in a device error occurring.
  • Do not frequently turn on/off the device. Otherwise, the product life might be shortened.
  • Back up important data on a regular basis when using the device.
  • Operating temperature: 0 °C to 45 °C (32 °F to 113 °F).
  • Salt pray in the operating environment of the device might corrode its electronic components and cables. To ensure the normal operation of the device and prolong its service life, use the device in an indoor environment that is 3 kilometers away from the sea.

Installation Requirements

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Installation Requirements - 1

WARNING

- Strictly comply with the local electric safety code and standards. Make sure the ambient voltage is stable and meets the power supply requirements of the device.

  • Do not expose the battery to environments with extremely low air pressure, or extremely high or low temperatures. Also, it is strictly prohibited for the battery to be thrown into a fire or furnace and to cut or put mechanical pressure on the battery. This is to avoid the risk of fire and explosion.
  • Use the standard power adapter or cabinet power supply. We will assume no responsibility for any injuries or damages caused by the use of a nonstandard power adapter.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - WARNING - 1

  • Do not place the device in a place exposed to sunlight or near heat sources.
  • Keep the device away from dampness, dust, and soot.
  • Put the device in a well-ventilated place, and do not block its ventilation.
    • Install the server on a stable surface to prevent it from falling.
  • The device is a class I electrical appliance. Make sure that the power supply of the device is connected to a power socket with protective earthing.
  • Use power cords that conform to your local requirements and rated specifications.
  • Before connecting the power supply, make sure the input voltage matches the server power requirement.
  • When installing the device, make sure that the power plug and appliance coupler can be easily reached to cut off power.
    • Install the server in an area that only professionals can access.
  • Extra protection is necessary for the device casing to reduce the transient voltage to the defined range.
  • If you did not push the HDD box to the bottom, then do not close the handle to avoid damage to the HDD slot.
    • Install the device near a power socket for emergency disconnect.
  • It is prohibited for non-professionals and unauthorized personnel to open the device casing.
  • Affix the device securely to the building before use.

Maintenance Requirements

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Maintenance Requirements - 1

WARNING

- Make sure to use the same model when replacing the battery to avoid fire or explosion. Dispose the battery strictly according to the instructions on it.

● Power off the device before maintenance.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - WARNING - 1

- AI module does not support hot plug. If you need to install or replace the AI module, unplug the device power cord first. Otherwise, it will lead to file damage on the AI module.

  • The device casing provides protection for internal components. Use a screwdriver to loosen the screws before detaching the casing. Make sure to put the casing back on and secure it in its original place before powering on and using the device.
  • It is prohibited for non-professionals and unauthorized personnel to open the device casing.
  • The appliance coupler is a disconnection device. Keep it at a convenient angle when using it. Before repairing or performing maintenance on the device, first disconnect the appliance coupler.

Transportation Requirements

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Transportation Requirements - 1

Transport the device under allowed humidity and temperature conditions.

Storage Requirements

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Storage Requirements - 1

Store the device under allowed humidity and temperature conditions.

Table of Contents

Foreword....I

Important Safeguards and Warnings....III

1 Overview....1

1.1 Introduction....1
1.2 Front Panel....1
1.3 Rear Panel 3
1.4 Menu Items....4

2 Installation and Powering Up 5

2.1 Installing HDD 5
2.2 Powering Up 7

2.2.1 Preparation....7
2.2.2 Powering up the Device 7

3 Initial Settings 8

3.1 Initializing the Device....8
3.2 Quick Settings ....11
3.3 Login....13

3.3.1 Logging in to PCAPP Client....13
3.3.2 Logging in to Web Interface ....17

3.4 Configuring Remote Device....18

3.4.1 Initializing Remote Device....18
3.4.2 Adding Remote Device....23

4 AI Operations....34

4.1 Face Detection ....34

4.1.1 Enabling AI Plan 34
4.1.2 Configuring Face Detection....35
4.1.3 Live View of Face Detection 37
4.1.4 Face Search....40

4.2 Face Recognition....44

4.2.1 Enabling AI Plan 44
4.2.2 Configuring Face Recognition 44
4.2.3 Live View of Face Recognition....45
4.2.4 Face Search....47

4.3 People Counting....49

4.3.1 Enabling AI Plan 49
4.3.2 People Counting 49
4.3.3 Queuing Detection....50
4.3.4 Live View ....52

4.4 Video Metadata....52

4.4.1 Enabling AI Plan 53
4.4.2 Configuring Video Metadata ....53
4.4.3 Live View of Video Metadata....54
4.4.4 AI Search....57

4.5 IVS....64

4.5.1 Enabling AI Plan ....64
4.5.2 Configuring IVS....64
4.5.3 Live View of IVS....69
4.5.4 IVS Search 72

4.6 Vehicle Recognition....73

4.6.1 Enabling AI Plan ....74
4.6.2 Setting Vehicle Recognition....74
4.6.3 Live View of Vehicle Recognition ....74
4.6.4 Searching for Detection Information....77

4.7 Crowd Distribution Map....77

4.7.1 Enabling AI Plan ....77
4.7.2 Configuring Crowd Distribution Map ....77
4.7.3 Live View of Crowd Distribution....79

4.8 Call Alarm....80

4.8.1 Enabling AI Plan ....80
4.8.2 Configuring Call Alarm ....80
4.8.3 Live View of Call Alarm....82

4.9 Smoking Alarm 82

4.9.1 Configuring Smoking Alarm....82
4.9.2 Live View of Smoking Alarm 83

5 General Operations 84

5.1 Live and Monitor....84

5.1.1 View Management ....85
5.1.2 Resources Pool....101
5.1.3 PTZ....102

5.2 Recorded Files 110

5.2.1 Playing Back Recorded Video....111
5.2.2 Clipping Recorded Video 115
5.2.3 Playing Back Snapshots....116
5.2.4 Exporting File 118
5.2.5 Video Tag....121
5.2.6 Locking Files 121

5.3 Alarm List 122
5.4 System Information....123
5.5 Background Task....123
5.6 Buzzer....124

6 System Configuration 125

6.1 Configuration Page 125
6.2 Device Management ....125

6.2.1 Viewing Device Information 126
6.2.2 Remote Devices....127

6.3 Network Management....141

6.3.1 Basic Network....141
6.3.2 Network Apps 148

6.4 Event Management....161

6.4.1 Alarm Actions....161
6.4.2 Local Device....167
6.4.3 Remote Device....174

6.5 Storage Management....180

6.5.1 Local Hard Disk 180
6.5.2 RAID 183
6.5.3 Network Hard Disk 190
6.5.4 FTP/SFTP 192

6.6 Video Recording 194

6.6.1 Storage Mode....194
6.6.2 Recording Schedule 199
6.6.3 Basic 201
6.6.4 Record Transfer 202

6.7 Security Strategy 203

6.7.1 HTTPS 204
6.7.2 Configuring Access Permission 208
6.7.3 Safety Protection....210
6.7.4 Enabling System Service Manually 211
6.7.5 Configuring Firewall 212
6.7.6 Configuring Time Synchronization Permission 213

6.8 Account Management 214

6.8.1 User Group 214
6.8.2 Device User 217
6.8.3 Password Maintenance....219
6.8.4 ONVIF 224

6.9 System Configuration....227

6.9.1 Setting System Parameters....227
6.9.2 System Time....228
6.9.3 Schedule....230

6.10 Network Storage 231

6.10.1 Creating Storage Pool 232
6.10.2 Managing Share Account 233
6.10.3 Configuring Share Folder 234
6.10.4 Configuring Share Control 236
6.10.5 Configuring FTP Parameters 237

7 System Management 238

7.1 File Management 238

7.1.1 Video Tag Management....238
7.1.2 FILE LOCKED....238
7.1.3 Watermark Verification....239

7.2 Task Management....240

7.3 Backup....243

7.4 AI Report....245

7.4.1 In-area People Counting Report 245

7.4.2 Queue People Counting Report....247

8 System Maintenance 249

8.1 Overview 249
8.2 System Information....250

8.2.1 Viewing Device Information 250
8.2.2 Viewing Legal Information 250

8.3 System Resources 250
8.4 Logs 251

8.5 Intelligent Diagnosis....253

8.5.1 Run Log....253
8.5.2 One-click Export 253
8.5.3 One-click Diagnosis 254

8.6 Network Care 254

8.6.1 Online User 254
8.6.2 Packet Capture 255

8.7 Device Maintenance 256

8.7.1 Upgrading Device....256
8.7.2 Default 258
8.7.3 Automatic Maintenance....258
8.7.4 IMP/EXP 259

8.8 Disk Maintenance 259

8.8.1 S.M.A.R.T Detection....260
8.8.2 Health Monitoring 260
8.8.3 SSD Health Detection....260
8.8.4 Firmware Update 260

9 PCAPP Introduction 262

9.1 Page Description 262
9.2 History Record....262
9.3 Viewing Downloads 263
9.4 Configuring PCAPP 263
9.5 Viewing Version Details....265

10 Log Out, Reboot, Shut Down, Lock 266

Appendix 1 Particulate and Gaseous Contamination Specifications .... 268

Appendix 1.1 Particulate Contamination Specifications....268
Appendix 1.2 Gaseous Contamination Specifications....268

Appendix 2 RAID 270

Appendix 3 Glossary 272

Appendix 4 Cybersecurity Recommendations....274

1 Overview

1.1 Introduction

The Device is designed for the management, storage and application of high-definition video data. It uses Linux operation system and professional customized hardware platform, and it is configured with multiple Hard Disk Drive (HDD) management system, front-end HD device management system, HD video analysis system and large capacity video storage system.

It adopts high-traffic data network transmission & forward technology and multi-channel video decoding & display technology, and realizes intelligent management, secure storage, fast forwarding and HD decoding of large capacity and multi-channel HD video data.

The Device provides standard network file sharing service and offers integrated network storage solution. It provides centralized storage solutions with large capacity, high scalability and high security for all kinds of video monitoring systems.

1.2 Front Panel

Figure 1-1 EVS7124D
Technical diagram of a multi-level heating or cooling unit with labeled components and control panel

Figure 1-2 EVS7148D
Technical diagram of a server rack with labeled components and connection ports

Table 1-1 Front panel description

No. NameDescription
1 Power buttonTurns on or off the Device.If the Device is off, press this button to turn the Device on.To turn off the Device, press and hold this button for 5 seconds.
2HDD status indicatorThe light is off when the HDD is in normal operation.The light is solid red if no HDD, HDD error or insufficient HDD space.
3Alarm status indicatorThe light is off when the Device is running properly.The light is solid red when the power, temperature or fan is abnormal.
4Network status indicatorThe light is solid red if there is a network failure, IP conflict or MAC conflict.
5USB portsConnect to external USB devices, such as flash drive.

1.3 Rear Panel

Figure 1-3 EVS7124D
Technical diagram of a server rack with labeled ports and hardware components, showing front and back views with annotations.

Figure 1-4 EVS7148D

Technical diagram of a server rack with labeled components and internal hardware layout

Table 1-2 Rear panel ports

No. PortDescription
1Power moduleConnects to AC power supply. Contains fans for case cooling.
2RS-232Used to debug general serial ports, configure IP address and transmit transparent serial data.
WEBGigabit management port. Can be used as data port.
SAS HDConnects to the expansion cabinet.The SAS HD ports might differ depending on the device you are using.We recommend using SAS HD2.
eSATAConnects to external storage devices.
USB 3.0Connects the mouse or USB storage devices.
EX-1–EX-4/1–4Gigabit Ethernet ports. Used to transfer data.
HDMIOutputs high definition video data and multi-channel audio data to external displays.
PCI-EHigh-speed expansion port, connects to components with X4 or X8 plug.

1.4 Menu Items

This section introduces the icons and buttons you will frequently use when using the Device.

Table 1-3 Icons and buttons

Icon/Button Description
DefaultRestore default configuration.
RefreshGet the latest configuration information.
SaveSave the modified configuration.
OK
CancelCancel the modified configuration and close the window.
Checkbox. You can select multiple configuration items at the same time.☑: Selected.
Radio button. You can select a configuration item. :Selected.
Drop-down list. Click this icon to display the drop-down menu.

2 Installation and Powering Up

2.1 Installing HDD

The HDD is not installed by default on factory delivery. You need to install it by yourself.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Installing HDD - 1

WARNING

Some devices are heavy and should be carried jointly by several persons to avoid injury. Step 1 Press the red button on the disk tray to unlock the handle.

Figure 2-1 Open the handle
Red Button

Step 2 Pull out the empty disk tray.

Figure 2-2 Disk tray
Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - WARNING - 2

natural_image Metallic computer case with multiple rectangular panels and mounting holes, mounted on a black rack (no text or symbols visible)

Step 3 Put the disk into the disk tray and fasten the screws at the bottom of the tray.

Figure 2-3 Fasten the screws
Screws Screws

Step 4 Insert the disk tray into the HDD slot, push it to the bottom and lock the handle.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - WARNING - 4

To avoid any damage to the slot, do not lock the handle until the disk tray has been pushed to the bottom.

2.2 Powering Up

2.2.1 Preparation

Properly connect the cables before powering up the Device and check against the following items:

● Make sure that all power lines are connected correctly.
- Check whether the supplied power voltage complies with device requirements.
- Check whether the network cables and SAS cables are connected correctly.

2.2.2 Powering up the Device

Press the power button on the front panel, and then check whether the indicators are normally displayed.

  • When the indicators are normal, the Device is powered up successfully.
  • If the indicators are abnormal, solve the problems and then power up the Device again.

3 Initial Settings

When using EVS for the first time, initialize the Device, and set basic information and functions first.

3.1 Initializing the Device

If it is your first time to use the Device after purchasing or after restoring factory defaults, set a login password of admin (system default user). At the same time, you can set proper password protection method.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Initializing the Device - 1

This section uses web remote initialization for example.

Step 1 Open the browser, enter IP address, and then press the Enter key.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Initializing the Device - 2

The default IP addresses of network port 1 to network port n in slot 1 are 192.168.1.108 to 192.168.n.108. Enter the corresponding IP address of the actually connected network port.

Step 2 On the Language Set page, select a country or region, a language, and a language standard. Click Next. The language setting step is only available on the local interface of the Device.

Figure 3-1 Time setting
Device Initialization 1 Time 2 Input Password 3 Password Protection Date 2019-11-04 Time 10:52:52 Time Zone Manual Setting Date/Time 2019 - 11 - 04 10 : 51 : 35 Sync with Internet Time Server Server clock.isc.org Auto Sync Time Interval 1 hours Next

Step 3 On the Time page, set time parameters.

Table 3-1 Time parameters description

Parameters Description
Time Zone The time zone of the Device.
Parameters Description
TimeSet system date and time manually or by synchronizing with NTP server time.Manual setting: Select date and time from the calendar.Sync with Internet Time Server: Select Sync with Internet Time Server, enter NTP server IP address or domain, and then set the automatic synchronization interval.Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Initializing the Device - 4Device time will synchronize with the server time after Sync with Internet Time Server is set.

Step 4 Click Next.

Figure 3-2 Set password
Device Initialization ✓ Time Input Password Password Protection Password Confirm Password Back Next

Step 5 Set admin login password.

Table 3-2 Description of password parameters

Parameters Description
UsernameThe default username is admin.
PasswordSet admin login password, and confirm the password.The password must consist of 8–32 non-blank characters and contain at least two types of the following characters: uppercase, lowercase, number, and special character (excluding ' "; : &). Enter a strong password according to the password strength indication.
Confirm Password

Step 6 Click Next.

Figure 3-3 Password protection
Device Initialization ✓ Time ✓ Input Password 3 Password Protection Email (To reset password) □ Email Back Finish

Step 7 Set password protection information.

You can use the email you set here to reset admin password. See "6.8.3.2 Resetting Password" for detailed information.

1) Click □ to enable email.
2) Enter an email address in the Email box.

Step 8 Click Finish to complete device initialization.

The device initialization success page is displayed. Click Enter quick settings to go to the quick setting page, and then set device basic information. See "3.2 Quick Settings" for details.

Figure 3-4 Initialization completed
Successfully initialized the device! Enter Quick Settings

3.2 Quick Settings

After initializing the Device, the system goes to quick settings page. You can quickly configure system time, and network settings.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Quick Settings - 1

Make sure that at least one Ethernet port has connected to the network before you set IP address.

Step 1 On the completion page of initialization, click Enter Quick Setting.

Figure 3-5 IP setting
Quick Configuration IP Set Enable It is recommended that virtual IP address and default NIC IP address should be in the same network segment. IP Address 192 . 168 . 0 . 108 Subnet Mask 255 . 255 . 0 . 0 Default Gateway 192 . 168 . 0 . 1 Slot Slot1 NIC NIC Type Dhcp IP Address Subnet Mask Mac Speed Operate Ethernet ... Electric Port No 192.168.1.127 255.255.255.0 10M/100M/10... Ethernet ... Electric Port No 192.168.2.108 255.255.255.0 10M/100M/10... Ethernet ... Electric Port No 192.168.3.108 255.255.255.0 10M/100M/10... Ethernet ... Electric Port No 192.168.4.108 255.255.255.0 10M/100M/10... DNS Server Default NIC IP Type IPV4 Default Ethernet Ethernet Network1 Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server address Preferred DNS 8 . 8 . 8 . 8 Alternate DNS 8 . 8 . 4 . 4 Finish

Step 2 Click ☐ to enable the virtual IP address, and then set the virtual IP address, subnet mask and default gateway.

The main board and standby board have their respective physical IP. After setting the virtual IP, despite the switch between the main and standby boards, you can always log in to the web interface with the virtual IP.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Quick Settings - 3

The default virtual IP address is 192.168.0.108. We recommend you set the virtual IP address and the IP address of the default NIC on the same network segment.

Step 3 Select a slot from Slot1 and Slot2 and then set the NICs in each slot.

1) Click of the corresponding NIC.

Figure 3-6 Edit Ethernet network
Edit Ethernet Network1 Speed 1000 Mb/s IP Type IPV4 Use Dynamic IP Address Use Static IP Address Static IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway MTU 1500 (1500-7200) OK Cancel

2) Set parameters.

Table 3-3 TCP/IP parameters description

Parameters Description
SpeedCurrent NIC max network transmission speed.
IP TypeSelect IPv4 or IPv6.
Use dynamic IP addressWhen there is a DHCP server on the network, check Use Dynamic IP Address, system can allocate a dynamic IP address to the Device. There is no need to set IP address manually.
Use static IP addressCheck Use Static IP Address, and then set static IP address, subnet mask and gateway to set a static IP address for the Device.
MTUSet NIC MTU value. The default setup is 1500 Byte.We recommend you check the MTU value of the gateway first and then set the Device MTU value equal to or smaller than the gateway value. Reduce the packets slightly and enhance network transmission efficiency.Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Quick Settings - 5Changing MTU value might result in NIC reboot, network offline and affect current running operation. Please be careful!

3) Click OK.

Device goes back to IP Set page.

Step 4 Set DNS server information.

You can select to get DNS server manually or enter DNS server information.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - 3) Click OK. - 1

This step is compulsive if you want to use domain service.

1) Select an IP type for DNS server. You can select IPv4 or IPv6.

2) Select the way of setting DNS IP address.

◇ Select Obtain DNS server address automatically, and then the Device can automatically get the DNS server IP address on the network.
◇ Select Use the following DNS server address, and then enter the preferred DNS IP address and the alternate DNS IP address.

Step 5 Set default NIC.

Select default NIC from the drop-down list.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - 3) Click OK. - 2

Make sure that the default NIC is online.

Step 6 Click Next to save settings.

3.3 Login

You can access and manage the Device remotely by using the PCAPP (PC client), or the web interface.

3.3.1 Logging in to PCAPP Client

Log in to the PCAPP for system configuration and operation.

Step 1 Download PCAPP.

1) Open the browser, enter IP address, and press Enter.

Figure 3-7 Web login
EVS Login for EVS admin Password TCP Forgot Password? Login Download PCAPP

2) Click Download PCAPP to download PCAPP installation package.

Step 2 Install PCAPP.

1) Double-click the PCAPP installation package.

The installation page is displayed.

Figure 3-8 Installation page
PCAPP English Install I Agree EUIA Custom >

2) Select a language of the PCAPP.
3) Click EULA, read through the content, and then select the checkbox of I Agree EULA.
4) (Optional) Click Custom and then select an installation path and create shortcut.

Figure 3-9 Custom installation
PCAPP English Install I Agree EUIA Custom Path : C:\Program Files (x86)\PCAPP\ Add Shortcut to Desktop

5) Click Install.

On completion, the completion page is displayed.

Figure 3-10 The installation is completed
PCAPP YUANSHOU Installation is complete Run

Step 3 Log in to PCAPP.

1) There are two ways to enter PCAPP.

- On the installation completion page, click Run.

- Double-click the shortcut icon on the PC desktop.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Step 3 Log in to PCAPP. - 1

- When PC theme is not Aero, the system will remind you to switch the theme. See Figure 3-11. To ensure video smoothness, switch your PC to Areo theme. For details, see "9.4 Configuring PCAPP". - System display PCAPP at full-screen by default. Click ▼ to display the task column. See Figure 3-12.

Figure 3-11 Prompt
iVSS Non Aero Your computer is using non-Aero theme, which will affect the video fluency. Please switch the theme to Aero. OK

Figure 3-12 Initial page
PCAPP | Please Enter URL → ≡ - □ r₀ ×

2) Enter device IP address, and then press Enter or click →.

Figure 3-13 Login
EVS Login for EVS admin Password TCP Forgot Password? Login

3) Enter device username and password.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Step 3 Log in to PCAPP. - 5

  • Click Login. For your device safety, change the admin password regularly and keep it well.
  • In case you forgot password, click Forgot password to reset. See "6.8.3.2 Resetting Password" for detailed information.

4) Select the login type among TCP, UDP and Multicast. Keep it TCP if you have no special requirement for TCP or UDP.

5) Click Login.

Figure 3-14 Home page
GE/5 LIVE MAINTAIN + Overview System Info System Resources Img Intelligent Diagnos... Network Care Device Maintain Disk Maintenance Qystview Mainboard V: 00.0.R Date 2022-04-21 04:01:04 Standby Board V: 06.0.R Date 2023-04-21 08:01:08 Remote Device 512 Remote Device Random 1 S Random 2 S Random 2 S Random 2 S Random 1 S Random 1 S Random 1 S Random 1 S Random 1 S Random 1 S Random 1 S Random 1 S Random 1 S Random 1 S Random 1 S Random 1 S Random 1 S Random 1 S Random 1 S Random 1 S Random 1 S Random 1 S Random 1 S Random 1 S Random 2 S Random 2 S Random 2 S Random 2 S Random 2 S Random 2 S Random 2 S Random 2 S Random 2 S Random 2 S Random 2 S Random 2 S Random 2 S Random 2 S Random 2 S Random 2 S Random 2 S Random 2 S Random 2 S Random 2 S Random 3 S Random 3 S Random 3 S Random 3 S Random 3 S Random 3 S Random 3 S Random 3 S Random 3 S Random 3 S Random 3 S Random 3 S Random 3 S Random 3 S Random 3 S Random 3 S Random 3 S Random 3 S Random 3 S Random 3 S Random 4 S Random 4 S Random 4 S Random 4 S Random 4 S Random 4 S Random 4 S Random 4 S Random 4 S Random 4 S Random 4 S Random 4 S Random 4 S Random 4 S Random 4 S Random 4 S Random 4 S Random 4 S Random 4 S Random 4 S Random 5 S Random 5 S Random 5 S Random 5 S Random 5 S Random 5 S Random 5 S Random 5 S Random 5 S Random 5 S Random 5 S Random 5 S Random 5 S Random 5 S Random 5 S Random 5 S Random 5 S Random 5 S Random 5 S Random 5 S Random 6 S Random 6 S Random 6 S Random 6 S Random 6 S Random 6 S Random 6 S Random 6 S Random 6 S Random 6 S Random 6 S Random 6 S Random 6 S Random 6 S Random 6 S Random 6 S Random 6 S Random 6 S Random 6 S Random 6 S Random 7 S Random 7 S Random 7 S Random 7 S Random 7 S Random 7 S Random 7 S Random 7 S Random 7 S Random 7 S Random 7 S Random 7 S Random 7 S Random 7 S Random 7 S Random 7 S Random 7 S Random 7S

Table 3-4 Home page description

No. Name Description
1 Task columnDisplays enabled application icon.Point to the app and then click × to close the app.The live function is enabled by default and cannot be closed.
2 Add iconClick to display or hide the app page. Open the app page to view or enable app.
3Operation pageDisplays currently enabled app operation page.
4System informationClick to view system information. See "5.4 System Info" for detailed information.
5One-click diagnosisCheck the configuration and status of the Device through one-click diagnosis for better use of the Device.
6BuzzerClick the icon to view buzzer messages. For details, see "5.6 Buzzer".
7Background taskClick to view the background running task information. See "5.5 Background Task" for detailed information.
8System configurationClick to enter system configuration mode. See "6 System Configuration" for detailed information.
9 Login userClick it to change user password, lock user, logout user, reboot device or close device.
10Quick settingsClick this icon and select Video or Network Storage to go to the STORAGE page.
11 Alarm listClick to view the unprocessed alarm event quantity. See "5.3 Alarm List" for detailed information.Drag this icon to move its position.

3.3.2 Logging in to Web Interface

System supports general browser such as Google Chrome, Firefox to access the web to manage the Device remotely, operate and maintain the system.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Logging in to Web Interface - 1

When you are using general browser to access the web, system supports setting function only. It cannot display the view. It is suggested that PCAPP should be used.

Step 1 Open the browser, enter IP address, and then press Enter.

Figure 3-15 Web login
EVS Login for EVS admin Password TCP Forgot Password? Login

Step 2 Enter username and password.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Logging in to Web Interface - 3

  • Click Login. For your device safety, change the admin password regularly and keep it well.
  • In case you forgot password, click Forgot password to reset. See "6.8.3.2 Resetting Password" for detailed information.

Step 3 Select the login type among TCP, UDP and Multicast. Keep it TCP if you have no special requirement for TCP or UDP.

Step 4 Click Login.

System displays LIVE page.

3.4 Configuring Remote Device

Register remote device to the system. Here you can view the live video from the remote device, change remote device settings, and so on.

3.4.1 Initializing Remote Device

After you initialize the remote device, you can change remote device login password and IP address. Remote devices can be connected to the Device only after being initialized.

Step 1

Click

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Initializing Remote Device - 1

or click

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Initializing Remote Device - 2

on the configuration page, and then select DEVICE.

Figure 3-16 Device management
Device List DeviceInfo Camera Name Remaining Packwidth Total PPS/1 Mbps 2024 Mbps - Removing Channels/Totary: 500-512 Channel No. State Channel Name Address Region ID Port User Name Password Manufacturer Product Model Sn Remote Or... Open I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I II III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III III II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100

Step 2 On the Device List page, click Add.

Step 3 On the Smart Add page, click Smart Search.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Initializing Remote Device - 4

To set search conditions, you can click .

Figure 3-17 Remote device
Add Device Smart Add Manual Add RTSP Import CSV File Stop Search Initialize Modify IP (0) Initialization State Address Product Model. Manufacturer Port Product Type Sn Operate ✓ Initialized Private 37777 IPC 2G02FEEPAA... ✓ Initialized Private 37777 IPC YZC4DZ032... ✓ Initialized Private 37777 CN6000 YZC3MW012... < Uninitialized Private 37777 IPC 5C00C36YA... ✓ Initialized Private 37777 IPC PZC4CV094... ✓ Initialized Private 37777 IPC 1A02C04YAZ... ✓ Initialized Private 37777 NVR 2J05923YAZ... < Uninitialized Private 37777 EVS 4M04984VA Total 20 Item(s) Show up to 50 1/1 GO Remaining Bandwidth/Total: 1018.06 Mbps/ 1024 Mbps Add Cancel

Step 4 Select the uninitialized remote device and then click Initialize.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Initializing Remote Device - 6

Click Initialization status and then select Uninitialized, you can quickly filter the uninitialized remote device.

Figure 3-18 Initializing the Device
Device Initialization Password Password Protection Modify IP Using current device password and password protection information admin Password Confirm Password Next Cancel

Step 5 Set remote device password and password protection.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Initializing Remote Device - 8

Using current device password and password protection information is enabled by default. Keep it enabled so as to automatically use current device admin password and email information without manual configuration. Go to Step 6 if you keep it enabled.

1) To manually configure password, click to disable Using current device password and password protection information.

Figure 3-19 Password setting
Device Initialization Password Password Protection Modify IP Using current device password and password protection information admin ****** ... Next Cancel

2) Set parameters.

Table 3-5 Description of password parameters

Parameters Description
UsernameThe default username is admin.
PasswordIn the New Password box, enter the new password and enter it again in the Confirm Password box.The password should consist of 8 to 32 non-blank characters and contain at least two types of characters among uppercase, lowercase, number, and special character (excluding '";: &). Enter a strong password according to the password strength indication.
ConfirmPassword

3) Click Next.

Figure 3-20 Password protection
Device Initialization ✓ Password Password Protection Modify IP Email (To reset password) ✓ Email Back Next Cancel

4) Set an email address.

Enter an email address. You can use the email address here to reset password in case you forgot password in the future.

Step 6 Click Next.

Figure 3-21 Modify IP
Device Initialization Password Password Protection Modify IP (1) Sn IP Address Static IP Address . . . Incremental Value 1 Subnet Mask . . . . Gateway . . . . Back Next Cancel

Step 7 Set camera IP address.

  • When there is DHCP server in the network, select DHCP, and the remote device gets dynamic IP address automatically. It is unnecessary to enter IP address, subnet mask and gateway.
  • Select Static, and then enter static IP address, subnet mask, default gateway and incremental value.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Step 7 Set camera IP address. - 1

  • After you enter incremental value, system can add the fourth address of the IP address one by one to automatically allocate the IP addresses.
  • If you want to change several devices IP addresses at the same time, system allocates IP address of the same network segment.
  • If there is IP conflict when changing static IP address, device pops up IP conflict dialogue box. If batch change IP address, device automatically skips the conflicted IP and begins the allocation according to the incremental value.

Step 8 Click Next.

Figure 3-22 Initialize
Device Initialization Finish No.(1) Sn IP Address Results 1 success Confirm and then add OK

Step 9 Click Confirm and Add, or click OK.

  • Click Confirm and Add: System completes initializing the remote device and then adds the remote device to the list. System goes back to Add device page.
  • Click OK: System completes initializing remote device. System goes back to Add device page.

3.4.2 Adding Remote Device

Device supports smart add, manual add and template add.

Table 3-6 Add mode

Add Mode Description
Smart AddSearch for the remote devices on the same network and then filter to register. For details, see "3.4.2.1 Smart Add".It is useful if you do not know the exact IP address.
Manual AddEnter the IP address, username and password of remote device. For details, see "3.4.2.2 Manual Add".For some remote devices, you can enter IP address, username, and password to register.
RTSPAdd remote devices through RTSP. For details, see "3.4.2.3 RTSP".To add stream media devices, you are recommended to choose RTSP.
Batch add (by CSV template)Fill in information about remote device in the template, import the template to add the Device. For details, see "3.4.2.4 Batch Add".For batch adding, when IP address, username and other information of remote device is inconsistent, it is suggested to use this mode.

3.4.2.1 Smart Add

Step 1 Click , and then select DEVICE.

Step 2 Click + or Add, and then select Smart Add.

Figure 3-23 Smart add
Add Device Smart Add Manual Add RTSP Batch Import Start Search Password Initialize Modify IP (1) Initialization State Address Product Model. Manufacturer Port Product Type Sn Operate ✓ Initialized 148S Onvif 80 -- -- LIVE ✓ Initialized SR_2 Onvif 80 -- -- ✓ Initialized SR_2 Onvif 80 -- -- ✓ Initialized 136S Private 37777 4M04994YA... ✓ Initialized 136S Private 37777 4M04994YA... ✓ Initialized 136S Private 37777 4M04994YA... ✓ Initialized 116 Private 37777 1.000.0000.0.R Total 8 Item(s) Show up to 50 1/1 GO Remaining Bandwidth/Total: 1024.00 Mbps/ 1024 Mbps Add Cancel

Step 3 Click Start Search.

©

To set search conditions, you can click .

Figure 3-24 Search results
Add Device Smart Add Manual Add RTSP Batch Import Start Search Password Initialize Modify IP (1) Initialization State Address Product Model. Manufacturer Port Product Type Sn Operate ✓ Initialized 148S Onvif 80 -- -- ✓ Initialized 136S Onvif 80 -- -- ✓ Initialized 136S Onvif 80 -- -- ✓ Initialized 136S Private 37777 4M04994YA... ✓ Initialized 136S Private 37777 4M04994YA... ✓ Initialized 136S Private 37777 4M04994YA... ✓ Initialized 116 Private 37777 1.000.0000.0.R Total 8 Item(s) Show up to 50 1/1 GO Remaining Bandwidth/Total: 1024.00 Mbps/ 1024 Mbps Add Cancel

Table 3-7 Result description

Parameters Description
Start SearchClick Start Search to start searching remote device. Now it becomes Stop Search.Click Stop Search to stop searching remote device.
PasswordEnter the username and password of the selected device for adding it.
InitializeSelect uninitialized remote device and then click Initialize to initialize remote device. See "3.4.1 Initializing Remote Device" for detailed information.
Modify IPSee "6.2.2.2 Changing IP Address" to change the registered device IP address.
Initialization StateDisplays remote device initialization status.Click to filter initialized or uninitialized remote device.
OperationClick LIVE to display real-time video from the remote device. See Figure 3-24.Click × or Close to close the real-time preview window.You can view the live video if admin password of the remote device is admin, or remote device admin password is the same as the system.
BandwidthDisplays bandwidth remaining and the total bandwidth.

Figure 3-25 Live view
Manufacturer Private Address Initialization State Initialized SN Product Type TPC Product Model TPC-BF5400 Port 37777 MAC Close

Step 4 Add a remote device.

Select a remote device, click Password, and then enter the username and password of the selected device. Click OK.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Step 4 Add a remote device. - 1

  • If you do not enter device username and password, the system will try to add the Device by using the username and password of the current EVS.
  • During the adding process, click Cancel, you can cancel adding process. Click Stop button of the corresponding remote device to cancel add.

Step 5 Click Add. The confirmation page is displayed.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Step 5 Click Add. The confirmation page is displayed. - 1

  • Double-click remote device IP address, username, password, manufacturer, port to change corresponding information.
  • If system fails to add the remote device, see the reason on the Status column to change the remote device information and then click Retry to try to add again.
  • If a remote device is exception due to network disconnection other reasons, it can also be added. It comes online after the exception is resolved.

Figure 3-26 Confirm
Add Confirm _ X Address User Name Password Manufacturer Port Channel No Status admin ***** Private 37777 Auto Allocation Added Remaining Bandwidth/Total: 996.96 Mbps/ 1024 Mbps Continue to add Finish

Step 6 Click Continue to add or Finish.

  • Click Continue to add, device goes back to Smart add page to add more remote device.
  • Click Finish to complete adding remote device process. Device displays Device page to view the newly added remote device information.

3.4.2.2 Manual Add

Step 1 Click , and then select DEVICE.

Step 2 Click + and then select Manual add.

Figure 3-27 Manual add
Add Device Smart Add Manual Add RTSP Batch Import + Add Device Delete There are no rows in the table! Remaining Bandwidth/Total: 997.36 Mbps/ 1024 Mbps Add Cancel

Step 3 Click Add Device.

Figure 3-28 Add device
Setting Channel No. Auto Allocation Manufacturer Private IP Address Port 37777 (1025-65535) User Name admin Password ******** Link Type Self-Adaptive TCP UDP Multicast Total Channels 1 Connect Select 1 - 1 Selected Clear Remote CH No. 1-1 1 OK Cancel

Step 4 Set parameters.

Table 3-8 Parameters of manual add

Parameters Description
Channel No.Select a channel number for the remote device on IVSS.If you selectAuto Allocation, IVSS will provide a channel number automatically.
ManufacturerDisplays the connection protocol of the remote device. Default protocol of the system isPrivate. ClickPrivateto select other protocols.
IP AddressEnter the IP address of the remote device.
Device SNEnter the unique SN allocated by the server for the remote device.When theManufacturerisRegister, you need to configure this parameter.
RTSP ModeSelectSelf-adaptiveorCustomizeIf the mode isCustomize, enter the RTSP port number.When theManufacturerisOnviforOnvifs, the two parameters are available.
RTSP Port
HTTP PortEnter the HTTP port number. The default port number is 80. The value ranges from 1 through 65535. After changing the HTTP port number, you need to add the HTTP port number to the IP address in the address bar of the browser for login.
HTTPS PortEnter the HTTP port number. The default port number is 80. The value ranges from 1 through 65535.When theManufacturerisOnvifs, you need to configure this parameter.
User NameEnter the username and password of the remote device.
Password
PortEnter the port number of the remote device.When theManufacturerisPrivate, you need to configure this parameter.
Remote CH No.Select the channel number for the remote device.1. Select a link type.2. To get the total number of channels, clickConnect.3. Enter the range of channels you need, and then clickSelected.4. ClickOK.

Step 5 Select the remote device and then click Add. Device begins adding remote device and pops up the confirmation page.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Manual Add - 3

  • During the adding process, click Cancel, you can cancel adding process. Click Stop button of the corresponding remote device to cancel.
  • Double-click remote device IP address, username, password, manufacturer, port to change corresponding information.

  • If system fails to add the remote device, see the reason on the Status column to change the remote device information and then click Retry to try to add again. See Figure 3-29.

  • If a remote device is exception due to network disconnection other reasons, it can also be added. It comes online after the exception is resolved.

Figure 3-29 Confirm

Add Confirm
AddressUser NamePasswordManufacturerPortChannel NoStatus
admin******Private37777Auto AllocationAdded
Remaining Bandwidth/Total: 996.96 Mbps/ 1024 Mbps Continue to add Finish

Step 6 Click Continue to add or Finish.

  • Click Continue to add, device goes back to Smart add page to add more remote device.
  • Click Finish to complete adding remote device process. Device displays Device page to view the newly added remote device information.

3.4.2.3 RTSP

Step 1 Click , and then select DEVICE.

Step 2 In the Device List page, click Add.

Step 3 Click RTSP.

Figure 3-30 RTSP
Add Device Smart Add Manual Add RTSP Batch Import Main Stream Rtsp:// Extra Stream Rtsp:// Channel No Auto Allocation Remaining Bandwidth/Total: 997.36 Mbps/ 1024 Mbps Add Cancel

Step 4 Enter RTSP address as required.

RTSP address format is rtsp://:@<IP

address>:/cam/realmonitor?channel=1&subtype=0.

  • Port: 554 by default.
  • Channel: The channel number of the stream media device to be added.
  • Subtype: Stream type. 0 for main stream, and 1 for sub stream.

Step 5 Select a channel No.

Step 6 Click Add.

3.4.2.4 Batch Add

Step 1 Click , and then select DEVICE.

Step 2 Click + , and then select Import CSV file tab.

Figure 3-31 Batch import
Add Device Smart Add Manual Add RTSP Batch Import Choose File Browse ○ Overwrite ● ADD ? Import Download Template Manufacturer Address User Name Password Port Channel No Remote CH No. Total 0 Item(s) Show up to 50 1/1 GO Remaining Bandwidth/Total: 997.36 Mbps/ 1024 Mbps Add Cancel

Step 3 Fill in template file.

1) Click Download Template to download template file.

File path might vary depending on page operations, and slight difference might be found on the actual page.

  • At PCAPP, click ≡, and then select Download to view file saving path. For details, see "9.3 Viewing Downloads".
  • Select file saving path during local operation.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Step 3 Fill in template file. - 1

- During web operations, files are saved under default downloading path of the browser.

2) Fill in template file and save according to your actual situation.

The following information of template file shall be filled in.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Step 3 Fill in template file. - 2

If information about remote device is not filled in completely, improve it after importing template.

Figure 3-32 Template

AddressRegist IDPortChannel No.Channel NameManufacturerUser NamePasswordLink TypeRemote CH No.Product ModelSN

Step 4 Import template file.

1) Click Browse to select the upgrade file.
2) Select an import mode and then click Import.

- Overwrite: The system removes the added remote devices before importing new devices.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Step 4 Import template file. - 1

If you select Overwrite, all the existing devices will be deleted.

- ADD: The system imports remote devices without deleting the existing ones.

Step 5 Select the remote device and then click Add.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Step 5 Select the remote device and then click Add. - 1

- If information about remote device is not filled in completely, improve it after importing template.

- If the system fails to add the remote device, check the reason on the Status column, change the remote device information and then click Retry to try to add again.

Figure 3-33 Confirm

Add Confirm
AddressUser NamePasswordManufacturerPortChannel NoStatus
admin******Private37777Auto AllocationAdded
Remaining Bandwidth/Total: 996.96 Mbps/ 1024 Mbps Continue to add Finish

Step 6 Click Continue to add or Finish.

- Click Continue to add, device goes back to Smart add page to add more remote device.

- Click Finish to complete adding remote device process. Device displays Device manager page to view the newly added remote device information.

4 AI Operations

In addition to the basic video monitoring functions, the Device can also provide a number of AI functions including face recognition, people counting, video metadata, vehicle recognition, and IVS (behavior detections such as fence-crossing, intrusion, loitering, crowd gathering, parking and more.). This chapter introduces how to configure the AI functions respectively.

The AI detections are done by camera (AI by Camera). The intelligent analysis job is completed on the camera, and EVS just receives and processes the results.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - AI Operations - 1

● The AI functions might vary depending on the Device function capability.
- To use AI by Camera, complete AI detection configuration at remote device. See remote device user's manual.
- The AI by Camera tab does not appear if the current camera does not support this function.
- Some AI features are conflicting. Do not enable conflicting AI features at the same time.

4.1 Face Detection

System triggers alarms when human faces are detected within the detection zone.

4.1.1 Enabling AI Plan

You need to enable AI plan first.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Enabling AI Plan - 1

• AI plan is available on select models.
- You need first enable the corresponding AI plan; otherwise the AI function does not work.
- The Device automatically shows the AI functions available on the connected cameras.

Step 1 Click 🎨, or click + on the configuration page, and then select EVENT.

Step 2 Select a camera in the device tree on the left.

Step 3 Select AI Plan > AI Plan > AI Plan.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Enabling AI Plan - 2

  • The page might vary depending on the function capabilities of cameras.
  • If the camera is a PTZ camera, configure presets on the camera system first, and then you can set AI features for each preset of the PTZ camera.

Figure 4-1 Al plan (1)
AI Plan AI Plan AI Display Face Detection ns Video Detect Value-Offset Targeting Device Offline Device Offline External Alarm kkt AI Plan Face Detection kkt Refresh Save Cancel

Figure 4-2 AI plan (2)
AI Plan AI Plan AI Display Face Detection Video Metabolism SNS Video Detect Visual/Option Temping Device Offline Device Office External Alarm ICS AI Plan Select Preset Preset1 Face Detection 0% Video Metabolism Face Detection 5% Video Metabolism Refresh Save Cancel

Step 4

Click

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Step 4 - 1

to enable AI detection plan. The icon becomes

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Step 4 - 2

When there is a conflict between the to-be-enabled AI plan and an enabled plan, disable the enabled plan first.

Step 5

Click Save.

4.1.2 Configuring Face Detection

Configure alarm rule of face detection.

Step 1

Click

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Step 1 - 1

or click

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Step 1 - 2

on the configuration page, and then select EVENT.

Step 2 Select a remote device in the device tree on the left.

Step 3 Select AI Plan > Face Detection.

Figure 4-3 Face detection
AI By Camera Enabled 2021-04-15 10:57:32 Click the mouse to draw the area. Face Enhance Deployment Time Default Schedule + Add Schedule » Record | IPC + Actions

Step 4 Click to enable face detection.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Step 1 - 4

Support the Face Enhance function. After enabling Face Enhance function, system displays enhanced human face zone on the surveillance window.

Step 5 Set detection region on the video (yellow area).

Figure 4-4 Area
2021-04-16 11:01:31 MIN MAX

- Click ✗ or white dot on detect region frame, and drag to adjust its size.

- Click min or max to set the minimum size or maximum size of the face detection area. System triggers an alarm once the size of detected target is between the maximum size and the minimum size.

Step 6 Click Deployment Time to select schedule from the drop-down list.

After setting arm period, system triggers corresponding operations when there is a motion detection alarm in the specified period.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Step 1 - 6

You can select an existing schedule from the Deployment Time drop-down list. You can also add a new schedule. For details, see "6.9.3 Schedule".

Step 7 Click Action to set alarm action. See "6.4.1 Alarm Actions" for detailed information.

Step 8 Click Save.

4.1.3 Live View of Face Detection

You can view real-time face detection images and video.

4.1.3.1 Setting AI Display

You can configure display rule of face detection results.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Setting AI Display - 1

Before using this function, ensure that view has been created. See "5.1.1 View Management" for detailed information.

Step 1

On the LIVE page, click

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Step 1 - 1

and select the Face tab.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Step 1 - 2

  • Click Sync from AI-Dis., obtain global smart detection display rule of EVS. See "6.4.2.4.2 Setting AI Display" for detailed information.
  • Click Apply to all windows to copy current configuration to other window(s).

Figure 4-5 Face
Face Human Vehicle Non-MotorVehicle Show Tracking Box: Time Gender Age Glasses Mouth Ma Face Detection Name Time Similar% FaceDB Features Panel: Transparence: 10 Gender Age Expression Glasses Mouth Mask Beard Sync from AI-Dis. Apply to all win OK Cancel

Step 2 Enable Show Tracking Box by clicking

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Step 2 Enable Show Tracking Box by clicking - 1

After it is enabled, when the system detects face or human, the window will display corresponding rule box.

Step 3 Enable Features Panel, and select feature(s) you want to display.

1) Click □ next to Features Panel, to enable the function. When the panel is enabled, the snapshots of detected faces are displayed on the live view.
2) Click □ to select Face Detection tab. √ indicates that the panel is selected.

3) (Optional) Drag 🔒 to adjust features panel transparency. The higher the value, the more transparent the features panel.

4) (Optional) Select the features you need to display.

• System supports displaying 4 feature types.

- System has checked four features by default. To select other features, cancel the selected features, and then select the ones you need.

Step 4 Click OK to save the configuration.

4.1.3.2 Live View

Go to the LIVE page, enable view, and then view videos are displayed. See Figure 4-6.

● The view window displays currently detected face rule boxes.
● Features panels are displayed on the right side in real time.

The features panel displays detection time, face snapshot and face features details.

Figure 4-6 Live
View View Group View1 IPC 108 View2 View3 IPC View4 108 sh Resources SearchDevice Name:SP 508 5C0707APAJEDA20 IPC IP PTZ Camera 5C0707APAJEDA20 IPC 4K02337YAJ1F1AE IPC IPC2 1D01D779AW00124 1D01D779AW00124 Door1 Door2 camers1 camers2 Access RTSP Media PTZ 23449 7045 3019 532 19:22:49 Gender: Male Age: Young Gleeson: No Mouth Mask: N Face Detection 19:22:47 Gender: Male Age: Young Gleeson: No Mouth Mask: N Face Detection 19:22:47 Gender: Female Age: Young Gleeson: Black-6 Mouth Mask: N Face Detection 19:22:47 Gender: Female Age: Young Gleeson: Genera Mouth Mask: N Face Detection 19:22:43 Gender: Male Age: Young Gleeson: Genera Mouth Mask: N Face Detection 19:22:45 Gender: Male Age: Young Gleeson: No Mouth Mask: N Face Detection

Point to a features panel, and click 📄 or double-click the detected image, so the system starts to play back the recorded videos (about 10 s) at the time of snapshot.

4.1.3.3 Face Records

On the LIVE page, click 🔥. The FACE TOTAL page is displayed. Click 🔥. And then select Face Detection. The latest face detection records are displayed.

Figure 4-7 Detection image
FACE TOTAL camera1 2019-10-15 19:35:37 Gender Male Age Young Glasses No Mouth Mask No Camera1 2019-10-15 19:35:36 Gender Female Age Young Glasses No Mouth Mask No Camera1 2019-10-15 19:35:37 Gender Male Age Young Glasses Genes Mouth Mask No camera1 2019-10-15 19:35:32 Gender Female Age Young Glasses No Mouth Mask No Face Detection Face Detection Face Detection Face Detection

On the FACE TOTAL page, the following operations are available.

  • Point to a piece of face record, click 📋 or double-click the detected image, and then the system starts to play back the recorded videos (about 10 s) at the time of snapshot.
  • Point to a piece of face record, click 📋, and then you can save that record locally including the video and pictures.

Search for face detection information, including face detection image, record and features.

4.1.4.1 Searching by Property

Step 1 Click + , select AI SEARCH > Search by Face.

Figure 4-8 Search by face
Device Scan/IDemizer Name/SIP Device Access RTSP Media Event Type A8 Face Property Gender A8 Age A8 Glasses A8 Mouse A8 Expressie A8 Beard A8 2019 - 10 - 15 00 00 00 2019 - 10 - 15 23 59 59 Query Search range 30 days No search results

Step 2 Select a remote device, and then set Event Type to be Face Detection.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Searching by Property - 2

In the Event Type drop-down list, if you select All, the search results will include both face detection records and face recognition records.

Step 3 Set face property and time.

Step 4 Click Query.

Figure 4-9 Search results
camera1 Gender : Female Age : Young Glasses : No Mouth Mask : No camera1 Gender : Male Age : Young Glasses : No Mouth Mask : No camera1 Gender : Male Age : Young Glasses : No Mouth Mask : No Face Detection camera1 Gender : Female Age : Young Glasses : No Mouth Mask : No camera1 Gender : Male Age : Young Glasses : No Mouth Mask : No face detection camera1 Gender : Male Age : Young Glasses : No Mouth Mask : No camera1 Gender : Male Age : Young Glasses : No Mouth Mask : Yes face detection camera1 Gender : Male Age : Young Glasses : No Mouth Mask : No camera1 Gender : Male Age : Young Glasses : No Mouth Mask : Yes face detection camera1 Gender : Male Age : Young Glasses : No Mouth Mask : Yes camera1 Gender : Male Age : Young Glasses : No Mouth Mask : No face detection camera1 Gender : Male Age : Young Glasses : No Mouth Mask : No camera1 Gender : Male Age : Young Glasses : No Mouth Mask : No

Point to a piece of record, and then the following icons are displayed.

Table 4-1 Description

Icon Operation
Select one by one: Click the panel or move the mouse pointer onto the panel, and then click to select the panel.means it is selected.Batch select: Check All to select all panels on the page.
Click or double-click the panel, the system starts to play back the recorded videos (about 10 s).
Click or select the panel and click to export images, videos and Excel to designated storage path.After setting alarm linkage snapshot, during exporting images, the system exports detected images and panoramic images at the time of snapshot.

4.1.4.2 Exporting Face Records

The search results of face records can be exported. You can select to export video, picture and excel.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Exporting Face Records - 1

  • The exported alarm-linked snapshot contains the face snapshot and the background picture.
  • To save the background picture, make sure that you have configured alarm-linked snapshot storage.

Figure 4-10 Search results of face records

AllAll(1) ExportTotal 40328 Records
2019-10-16camera100:00:00camera1 00:00:00camera1 00:00:00
Gender : Male Age : Young Glasses : Black-fra... Mouth Mask : NoGender : Male Age : Young Glasses : General Mouth Mask : NoGender : Female Age : Young Glasses : No Mouth Mask : No
Face DetectionFace Detection
camera100:00:02camera1 00:00:03camera1 00:00:04
Gender : Female Age : Child Glasses : No Mouth Mask : NoGender : Male Age : Young Glasses : No Mouth Mask : NoGender : Female Age : Young Glasses : General Mouth Mask : No
Face DetectionFace Detection
camera100:00:06camera1 00:00:07camera1 00:00:08
Gender : Male Age : Middle-agent Glasses : No Mouth Mask : NoGender : Male Age : Young Glasses : Black-fra... Mouth Mask : NoGender : Male Age : Young Glasses : General Mouth Mask : No
Face DetectionFace Detection
camera100:00:09camera1 00:00:09camera1 00:00:09
Gender : Male Age : Young Glasses : No Mouth Mask : NoGender : Male Age : Young Glasses : General Mouth Mask : NoGender : Male Age : Young Glasses : General Mouth Mask : No
Face DetectionFace Detection
camera100:00:10camera1 00:00:10camera1 00:00:11
Gender : Male Age : Young Glasses : Black-fra... Mouth Mask : NoGender : Female Age : Young Glasses : Black-fra... Mouth Mask : NoGender : Male Age : Young Glasses : No Mouth Mask : No

- Export in batches

Export more than one record. Support specifying file formats.

Step 1 Select more than one record.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Exporting Face Records - 2

To export all records, select the checkbox of All.

Step 2 Click ↗, and then select file formats.

Figure 4-11 File format
Export ✓ Export Excel ✓ Export Video ✓ Export Picture OK

Step 3 Click OK, and then follow the onscreen instructions to finish exporting.

- Export one by one

Export one piece of record. The exported file contains excel, snapshot and video by default.

Step 1 Point to a piece of record, and then click.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Exporting Face Records - 4

Step 2 Select a file type between DAV and MP4, set the saving path, and then click OK.

4.2 Face Recognition

The system compares captured face with the face database. When the similarity reaches the threshold as you have defined, an alarm will be triggered.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Face Recognition - 1

Make sure that the face database has been configured on the camera. For details, see user's manual of camera.

4.2.1 Enabling AI Plan

To use AI by Camera, you need to enable the corresponding AI plan first. For details, see "4.1.1 Enabling AI Plan".

4.2.2 Configuring Face Recognition

Configure face recognition rules.

Step 1 Click 🎨, or click + on the configuration page, and then select EVENT.

Step 2 Select remote device in the device tree on the left.

Step 3 Select AI Plan > Face Recognition.

Figure 4-12 Face recognition
AI By Camera Enabled Deployment Time Default Schedule + Add Schedule Record | IPC + Actions

Step 4 Click □ to enable face recognition.

Step 5 Click Deployment Time to select schedule from the drop-down list.

After setting arm period, system triggers actions when there is a motion detection alarm in the specified period.

  • Click View Schedule to view detailed schedule settings.
  • If the schedule is not added or the added schedule does not meet actual needs, click Add Schedule. See "6.9.3 Schedule" for detailed information.

Step 6 Click Actions to set alarm actions. For details, see "6.4.1 Alarm Actions".

Step 7 Click Save.

4.2.3 Live View of Face Recognition

Smart panel display. You can view real-time face detection and human face recognition images.

4.2.3.1 Setting AI Display

You can configure display rule of AI detection results.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Setting AI Display - 1

Before using this function, ensure that view has been created. See "5.1.1 View Management" for detailed information.

Step 1 On the LIVE page, open a view window.

Step 2 Click and select the Face tab.

  • Click Sync from AI-Dis., obtain global smart detection display rule of EVS. See "6.4.2.4.2 Setting AI Display" for detailed information.
  • Click Apply to all windows to copy current configuration to other window(s).

Figure 4-13 Face
Face Human Vehicle Non-MotorVehicle Show Tracking Box: Time Gender Age Glasses Mouth Ma Face Detection Name Time Similar% FaceDB Features Panel: Transparency: 10 Gender Age Expression Glasses Mouth Mask Beard Sync from AI-Dis. Apply to all win OK Cancel

Step 3 Click □ next to Show Tracking Box, to enable the function.

After it is enabled, when the system detects face or human, the window will display corresponding rule box.

Step 4 Enable features panel.

1) Click □ next to Features Panel, to enable the function. When the panel is enabled, the snapshots of detected faces are displayed on the live view.

2) Click □ to select Face DB tab and Face Recognition tab. √ indicates that the panel is selected.

  • If the Face DB panel is selected, it is displayed on the live video when the similarity between a detected face and one in the face database reaches the threshold.
  • If the Face Recognition panel is selected, it is displayed on the live video when the similarity between a detected face and one in the face database does not reach the threshold.

3) (Optional) Drag 📷 to adjust features panel transparency. The higher the value, the more transparent the features panel.

4) (Optional) Select the features you need to display.

● System supports displaying 4 feature types.
- System has checked four features by default. To select other features, cancel the selected features, and then select the ones you need.

Step 5 Click OK to save the configuration.

4.2.3.2 Live View

Go to the LIVE page, enable view, and then device displays view video.

  • The view window displays currently detected face rule box.
  • The right side displays features panel.

The features panel displays detection time, face snapshot and face features.

Point to a features panel, and then click 📄 or double-click the detected image, so the system starts to play back the recorded videos (about 10 s) at the time of snapshot.

4.2.3.3 Face Total

On the LIVE page, click 📁. Face detection panel is displayed. Point to a panel, and the operation icons are displayed.

Figure 4-14 Detection image
FACE TOTAL camera1 2019-10-17 14:45:48 Gender Male Age Young Glasses No Mouth Mask No 2019-10-17 14:45:47 Gender Female Age Young Glasses No Mouth Mask No 2019-10-17 14:45:46 Gender Female Age Young Glasses Gener. Mouth Mask No 2019-10-17 14:45:45 Gender Male Age Young Glasses Gener. Mouth Mask No Face Detection Face Detection Face Detection Face Detection

  • Point to a panel, and click 📋 or double-click the detected image, so the system starts to play back the recorded videos (about 10 s) at the time of snapshot.
  • Point to a panel, click 📄, and then you can save that record locally.

Search for face detection information, including face detection image, record and features. Search according to record and image.

Procedure

Step 1

Click

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Step 1 - 1

select AI SEARCH > Search by Face.

Figure 4-15 Search by face
Device Search/Device Name/IP Device Access RTSP Media Event Type A8 Face Property Gender A8 Age A8 Glasses A8 Mou... A8 Expressix A8 Beard A8 2019 - 10 - 15 00 : 00 : 00 2019 - 10 - 15 23 : 59 : 59 Query Search range 30 days No search results

Step 2 Select a remote device, and then set Event Type to be Face Detection.
Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Step 1 - 3

In the Event Type drop-down list, if you select All, the search results will include both face detection records and face recognition records.

Step 3 Set face property and time.

Step 4 Click Query.

Figure 4-16 Search results
A&E 2019-10-15 AI&DI Export Total 26077 camera1 Gender : Female Age : Young Glasses : No Mouth Mask : No camera1 Gender : Male Age : Young Glasses : No Mouth Mask : No camera1 Gender : Male Age : Young Glasses : No Mouth Mask : No camera1 Gender : Male Age : Young Glasses : No Mouth Mask : No camera1 Gender : Male Age : Young Glasses : No Mouth Mask : No camera1 Gender : Male Age : Young Glasses : No MSouth Mask : No camera1 Gender : Male Age : Young Glasses : No Mouth Mask : No camera1 Gender : Male Age : Young Glasses : No Mouth Mask : No camera1 Gender : Male Age : Young Glasses : No Mouth Mask : No camera1 Gender : Male Age : Young Glasses : No Mouth Mask : No camera1 Gender : Male Male Age: Elderly Glasses - No Mouth Mask - No camera1 Gender : Male Age: Young Glasses - No Mouth Mask - No camera1 Gender : Male Age: Young Glasses - No Mouth Mask - No camera1 Gender : Male Age: Young Glasses - No Mouth Mask - No camera1 Gender : Male Age: Young Glasses - No Mouth Mask - No

Point to a piece of record, the following icons are displayed.

Table 4-2 Description

Icon Operation
[2CKX]Select one by one: Click the panel or move the mouse pointer onto the panel, and then click Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Related Operations - 1 to select the panel. [2800] means it is selected.Batch select: Check All to select all panels on the page.
[16WG]Click [4KWDS] or double-click the panel, the system starts to play back the recorded videos (about 10 s).
Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Related Operations - 2Click [H43X] or select the panel and click ↗ to export images, videos and Excel to designated storage path.After setting alarm linkage snapshot, during exporting images, the system exports detected images and panoramic images at the time of snapshot.

4.3 People Counting

Statistics of in-area people number, and queuing number.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - People Counting - 1

- The people counting function is only available with AI by Camera. Make sure that the camera has been configured with people counting rules.

- The old people counting data will be overwritten when the storage space is runs out. You are recommended to back up the data in time.

4.3.1 Enabling AI Plan

To use AI by Camera, you need first enable the corresponding AI plan; otherwise the AI function does not work. For details, see "4.1.1 Enabling AI Plan".

4.3.2 People Counting

Configure this function to count the number of people in and out of the detection area. When the statistical number is larger or smaller than the threshold, an alarm is triggered.

Step 1 Click ⚙️, click +, and then select EVENT.

Step 2 Select a camera in the device tree, and then select AI Plan > People Counting > In Area No. Figure 4-17 In Area No.

All To-Camers 2011-04-16 08:38:12 Click the mouse to draw the area. Area People Countin... → 10 People(0-80) Stand Alam 300 Second(1-1800) Deployment Time Add Schedule Record | 1 Log | Enable Actions Refresh Save Cancel

Step 3 Click to set a people counting area. Click and drag ✗ to adjust the position and length.

  • Click the white dot on the frame of the area to add turning corners.
  • Click to restore to the default area.

Step 4 Set parameters.
Table 4-3 Parameters description of people counting

Parameters Description
EnableClick to enable the selected area.
Name Enter area name
Area People Counting Alarm1. Click to enable the alarm.2. Set people number threshold.Select >=▼, and enter a threshold value. When the people number in the area is greater than the threshold, an alarm will be triggered.Select <=▼, and enter a threshold value. When the people number in the area is smaller than the threshold, an alarm will be triggered.
Strand Alarm1. Click to enable the alarm.2. Set time threshold for the alarm. When the dwell time of any person in the area is greater than the threshold, an alarm will be triggered.

Step 5 Select a schedule in the Deployment Time drop-down list.

Alarms are triggered only within the scheduled time.

Step 6 Click Actions to set alarm linkage actions. For details, see "6.4.1 Alarm Actions".

Step 7 Click Save.

4.3.3 Queuing Detection

The system counts the number of people queuing in the detection area. When the number of people exceeds the threshold or the queue time is longer than the pre-defined time, an alarm is triggered.

Step 1 Click , click + , and then select EVENT.

Step 2 Select a camera in the device tree, and then select AI Plan > People Counting > Queuing.

Figure 4-18 Queuing
AI Plan AI Plan AI Display People Counting MS Video Detect Visualization Tampering Device Offline External Alarm People Counting Drawing Click the mouse to show the area. Enable Name: 11 Area Puzzle Coordination: 0.0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 Deployment Time: 7.5ms Add Schedule Record: 1 Log | Enable Actions Refresh Save Cancel

Step 3 Draw a queuing detection area.

1) Click to draw the first detection area.

Click to draw more areas. You can draw 4 areas at most.

2) Click to edit the area.

◇ Click and drag ✗ to adjust the position and length.
◇ Click the white dot on the frame of the area to add turning corners.
◇ Click to restore to the default area.

Step 4 Set parameters.

Table 4-4 Parameters description of queuing detection

Parameters Description
EnableClick to enable the selected area.
NameEnter the area name
Area People Counting Alarm1. Click to enable the alarm.2. Set people number threshold.Select >=▼, and enter a threshold value. When the people number in the area is greater than the threshold, an alarm will be triggered.Select <=▼, and enter a threshold value. When the people number in the area is smaller than the threshold, an alarm will be triggered.
Queuing Time Alarm1. Click □ to enable the alarm.2. Set time threshold for the alarm. When the queuing time of any person in the area is longer than the threshold, an alarm will be triggered.

Step 5 Select a schedule in the Deployment Time drop-down list.

Alarms are triggered only within the scheduled time.

Step 6 Click Actions to set alarm linkage actions. For details, see "6.4.1 Alarm Actions".

Step 7 Click Save.

4.3.4 Live View

On the LIVE page, enable a view window that contains people counting video.

The live video which shows real-time people number and queuing time is displayed.

Figure 4-19 Live view
Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Live View - 1

The live video displays real-time people number in the region, and the region frame flashes red once there is an alarm. The queue-detection live view also shows head frames and the dwell time of each person.

4.4 Video Metadata

The system analyzes real-time video stream to detect the existence of 4 target types: human, human face, motor vehicle, non-motor vehicle. Once a target is detected, the system can record video, take snapshots and trigger alarms.

This section introduces how to configure the video metadata feature from enabling it and selecting target types to setting the live view of video metadata.

4.4.1 Enabling AI Plan

Enable AI plan when AI by Camera is used. See "4.1.1 Enabling AI Plan" to enable AI detect function.

4.4.2 Configuring Video Metadata

After enabling video metadata, EVS links the current remote device for taking snapshots when alarm is triggered.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Configuring Video Metadata - 1

Video metadata cannot be enabled at the same time with face detection and IVS, because it conflicts with the two functions.

Step 1 Click 🎨 or + , and then select EVENT.

Step 2 Select a device from the device tree at the left side.

Step 3 Select AI Plan > Video Metadata.

Figure 4-20 Video metadata
AI & Camera Prent Pres1 2021-04-20 13:26:27:10 RuleName Enland People Vehicle Non Motor Vehicle Disbursement Time Add Schedule

Step 4 Select the detection target.

  • People: Click the corresponding □ to enable people detection. Face detection can also be enabled at the same time.
  • Vehicle: Click the corresponding □ to enable vehicle detection.
  • Non-Motor Vehicle: Click the corresponding ☐ to enable non-motor vehicle detection.

Step 5 Click Deployment Time drop-down list to select schedule.

EVS links alarm event when an alarm is triggered within the schedule configured.

  • Click Add Schedule to add new schedule if no schedule is added or the existing schedule does not meet requirements. For details, see "6.9.3 Schedule".
  • Click View Schedule to view details of schedule.

Step 6 Click Save.

4.4.3 Live View of Video Metadata

View the detection results of face, people, motor vehicle and non-motor vehicle on the LIVE page.

4.4.3.1 Setting AI Display

Set the filtering conditions to display AI detection results.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Setting AI Display - 1

Create view(s) before setting filtering conditions. To create a view, see "5.1.1 View Management".

Step 1 Select a view from LIVE > View > View Group.

Step 2 Click ☐ at the lower side of the LIVE page, and then select Face, Human, Vehicle or Non-Motor Vehicle.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Setting AI Display - 2

The figure uses Human for example. The page is for reference only.

Figure 4-21 Human
View1 IPC Face Human Vehicle Non-Motor Vehicle Show Tracking Box: Time Top Color Sleeve L... Bottom ... Bottom ... Human Detection Time Human Detection Features Panel: Transparency: 10 Top Color Sleeve Length Bottom Color Bottom Type Hat Bag Age Gender Umbrella Hair Style Direction Hold a Baby. Sync from AI-Dis. Apply to all win OK Cancel

Step 3 Click □ next to Show Tracking Box, and then a tracking box is displayed in the video when target that meets the filtering conditions is detected.

Step 4 Configure feature panel.

1) Click next to Features Panel to enable feature panel.

A features panel is displayed on the right side of the video when target that meets the conditions is detected.

2) Click □ to select the panel type, for example, the Human Detection tab.

3) (Optional) Drag to adjust the transparency of panel. The higher the value, the more transparent the panel.

4) (Optional) Select the features to be displayed in the panel.

• Up to 4 features can be displayed.

- 4 features are selected by default. To select another feature, click the selected feature to cancel it, and then click the feature to be displayed.

Step 5 Click OK.

4.4.3.2 Live View

On the LIVE page, select a view from View Group, and the video image of the view will be displayed. See Figure 4-23.

- Rule box is displayed in real-time in the video image. Different detection targets correspond to different colors of rule box.

● Features panels are displayed on the right side of the video image.

Figure 4-22 Live
Rule box Feature panel 2011/48-21 06:30:41 10:22:32 Husband's up Color Occupancy Type Top color Home-Motor Vehicle Detected 10:22:31 Plate Type: Chalkdown Color Logo Chalkdown Vehicle Detected 10:22:31 Top color Color Bottom color Bottom color Bottom color Human Detected 10:22:31 Top color Color Bottom color Bottom color Bottom color Human Detected

Point to the features panel, and then click ☐, or double-click the detected image to play back the video record (10 s before and after the snapshot).

4.4.3.3 Detection Statistics

View the detection statistics of human, motor vehicle and non-motor vehicle.

4.4.3.3.1 Human

On the LIVE page, click 📁, the PEOPLE TOTAL page is displayed.

Click 📋, and then select Snap With Face and Snap Without Face. The information of detected human and face is displayed.

  • Point to the snapshot, and then click 📋 or double-click a pted picture to play back the video record (10 s before and after the snapshot).
  • Point to the snapshot, and then click → to export the video record to specified saving path.

4.4.3.3.2 Motor Vehicle

On the LIVE page, click 🙏, the VEHICLE TOTAL page is displayed.

Click 📋, and then select Vehicle Recognition, the information of detected vehicles is displayed. See Figure 4-24.

Figure 4-23 Motor vehicle detection
VEHICLE TOTAL camera4 2019-10-21 19:58:34 Camera4 2019-10-21 19:57:32 Camera4 2019-10-21 19:56:30 Camera4 2019-10-21 19:55:28 Plate Record Type UnKnc Color Logo UnKnc Vehicle Detection Plate Record Type UnKnc Color Logo UnKnc Vehicle Detection Plate Record Type UnKnc Color Logo UnKnc Vehicle Detection

  • Move the mouse pointer to the panel, and then click 📋, or double-click detected picture to play back the video record (10 s before and after the snapshot).
  • Move the mouse pointer to the panel, and then click 📋 to export the video record to specified saving path.

4.4.3.3.3 Non-motor Vehicle

On the LIVE page, click 📖, the NONMOTOR TOTAL page is displayed.

Click 📁, and then select Snap With Face and Snap Without Face. The information of detected non-motor vehicles is displayed.

Figure 4-24 Non-motor vehicle detection
NONMOTOR TOTAL IPC 2019-04-16 08:54:58 Helmct Unknown Color ■ Occupancy 0 Type Two-wh... IPC 2019-04-16 08:54:50 Helmct Unknown Color ■ Occupancy 1 Type Two-wh... IPC 2019-04-16 08:54:47 Helmct Unknown Color ■ Occupancy 1 Type Two-wh... IPC 2019-04-16 08:54:39 Helmct Unknown Color ■ Occupancy 1 Type Two-wh... Non-MotorVehicle Detect Non-MotorVehicle Detect Non-MotorVehicle Detect Non-MotorVehicle Detect 0 9804 86002 4026

  • Move the mouse pointer to the detected information, and then click 🔒, or double-click detected picture to play back the video record (10 s before and after the snapshot).
  • Move the mouse pointer to the detected information, and then click 📋 to export the video record to specified saving path.

Select device and set properties to search for detection results.

Select device and set human properties to search human detection results.

Step 1 Click + , and then select AI SEARCH > Search by Human.

Figure 4-25 Search by human
SearchDevice Name/IP Device 1-3 2-IPC 3-IPC 4-16 5-1 6-camera26 Access RTSP Media Event Type All Human Property Gender All Age All Slee... All Color Bott... All Color Bag All 2021 - 04 - 15 00 : 00 : 00 2021 - 04 - 15 23 : 59 : 59 Query Search range 30 days

Step 2 Select a device, and then set human properties and time period.

Click or to set the color. means more than one color.

Step 3 Click Query.

  • If face is captured, the human and face snapshots are displayed.
  • If no face is captured, the human snapshot and human properties are displayed.

Figure 4-26 Search result
2019-04-17 Camera1 00:00:04 Cost Unknown Top Color Bottom Unknown Bottom G Camera1 00:01:03 Cost Unknown Top Color Bottom Unknown Bottom G Camera1 00:01:04 Cost Unknown Top Color Bottom Unknown Bottom G Camera1 00:01:09 Cost Unknown Top Color Bottom Unknown Bottom G Camera1 00:01:16 Cost Unknown Top Color Bottom Unknown Bottom G Camera1 00:01:17 Cost Unknown Top Color Bottom Unknown Bottom G Camera1 00:01:18 Cost Unknown Top Color Bottom Unknown Bottom G Camera1 00:01:29 Cost Unknown Top Color Bottom Unknown Bottom G Camera1 00:01:45 Cost Unknown Top Color Bottom Unknown Bottom G Camera1 00:01:46 Cost Unknown Top Color Bottom Unknown Bottom G Camera1 00:01:47 Cost Unknown Top Color Bottom Unknown Bottom G Camera1 00:01:47 Cost Unknown Top Color Bottom Unknown Bottom G Camera1 00:01:48 Cost Unknown Top Color Bottom Unknown Bottom G Camera1 00:01:49 Cost Unknown Top Color Bottom Unknown Bottom G Camera1 00:01:50 Cost Unknown Top Color Bottom Unknown Bottom G Camera1 00:01:51 Cost Unknown Top Color Bottom Unknown Bottom G Camera1 00:01:52 Cost Unknown Top Color Bottom Unknown

Point to one displayed panel, and the icons are displayed.

Table 4-5 Operation

Icon Operation
Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Related Operations - 1Select one by one: Click to select the panel. means the panel is selected.Select in batches: Select All to select all the panels on the page.
Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Related Operations - 2Click or double-click the panel to play back the video record (10 s before and after the snapshot).
Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Related Operations - 3Click , or select the panel and then click to export picture, video, and Excel file to specified saving path.

Set event type and vehicle properties to search vehicle detection results.

Procedure

Step 1 Click + and then select AI SEARCH > Search by Vehicle.

Figure 4-27 Vehicle search
Device SearchNDevice Names/XP Device 1D01D77PAW00124 18 current(s) Access RTSP Media Event Type Vehicle Detection Vehicle Property Type All Color Logo All Plate Plate Color Plate Number: 2019 - 10 - 21 00 00 : 00 2019 - 10 - 21 23 : 59 : 59 Query Search range 30 days

Step 2 Select Vehicle Detection as Event Type.

Step 3 Set vehicle properties and time period.

Click or to set the color. means more than one color.

Step 4 Click Query.

If license plate is detected, both the scenario and the license plate will be displayed.

Figure 4-28 Search result
2019-04-17 Camera1 30:00:15 camera1 00:00:16 camera1 00:00:13 camera1 00:00:11 camera1 00:00:11 Photo Color Type Unknown Camera Vehicle Detection Camera1 30:00:14 camera1 00:00:16 camera1 00:00:14 camera1 00:00:11 Photo Color Type Unknown Camera Vehicle Detection Camera1 30:00:17 camera1 00:00:17 camera1 00:00:17 Photo Color Type Unknown Camera Vehicle Detection Camera1 30:00:18 camera1 00:00:19 camera1 00:00:19 Photo Color Type Unknown Camera Vehicle Detection Camera1 30:00:19 camera1 00:00:19 camera1 20:00:19 Photo Color Type Unknown Camera Vehicle Detection Camera1 30:00:20 camera1 00:00:20 camera1 20:00:20 Photo Color Type Unknown Camera Vehicle Detection

Point to one displayed panel, and the icons are displayed.

Figure 4-29 Icons
camera1 00:00:10 Plate Color Type Unknown Logo Unknown

Table 4-6 Operation

Icon Operation
Select one by one: Click to select the panel.means the panel is selected.Select in batches: Select All to select all the panels on the page.
Click or double-click the panel to play back the video record (10 s before and after the snapshot).
Click , or select the panel and then click to export picture, video, and Excel file to specified saving path.

Set event type and non-motor vehicle properties to search non-motor vehicle detection results.

Procedure

Step 1 Click + and then select AI SEARCH > Search by NonMotor.

Figure 4-30 Search by non-motor vehicle
SearchDevice Name/IP Device 1-3 2-IPC 3-IPC 4-16 5-1 6-camera6 Access RTSP Media Event Type: All Non-Motor Property Type: All Color Subc... All Num... All Bag: All 2021 - 04 - 15 00 : 00 : 00 2021 - 04 - 15 23 : 59 : 59 Query Search range 30 days

Step 2 Select the Device you want to search.

Step 3 Set non-motor vehicle properties and time period.

Click or to set the color. means more than one color.

Step 4 Click Query.

Figure 4-31 Search results
Total 1000 records 2019-04-01 2019-04-02 2019-04-03 2019-04-04 2019-04-05 2019-04-06 2019-04-07 2019-04-08 2019-04-09 2019-04-10 2019-04-11 2019-04-12 2019-04-13 2019-04-14 2019-04-15 2019-04-16 2019-04-17 Non-Metro/Wide Dr... IPC 17.37.47 Type: Super- Color ■ Hidnet Unicosen Occupant 1 IPC 17.37.58 Type: Super- Color ■ Hidnet Unicosen Occupant 1 IPC 17.38.55 Type: Super- Color ■ Hidnet Unicosen Occupant 1 IPC 17.38.62 Type: Super- Color ■ Hidnet Unicosen Occupant 1 IPC 17.38.64 Type: Super- Color ■ Hidnet Unicosen Occupant 1 IPC 17.38.67 Type: Super- Color ■ Hidnet Unicosen Occupant 1 IPC 17.38.69 Type: Super- Color ■ Hidnet Unicosen Occupant 1 IPC 17.38.72 Type: Super- Color ■ Hidnet Unicosen Occupant 1 IPC 17.38.75 Type: Super- Color ■ Hidnet Unicosen Occupant 1 IPC 17.38.78 Type: Super- Color ■ Hidnet Unicosen Occupant 1 IPC 17.38.81 Type: Super- Color ■ Hidnet Unicosen Occupant 1 IPC 17.38.84 Type: Super- Color ■ Hidnet Unicosen Occupant 1 IPC 17.38.86 Type: Super- Color ■ Hidnet Unicosen Occupant 1 IPC 17.38.89 Type: Super- Color ■ Hidnet Unicosen Occupant 1 IPC 17.38.92 Type: Super- Color ■ Hidnet Unicosen Occupant 1 IPC 17.38.95 Type: Super- Color ■ Hidnet Unicosen Occupant 1 IPC 17.38.98 Type: Super- Color ■ Hidnet Unicosen Occupant 1 IPC 17.38.99 Type: Super- Color ■ Hidnet Unicosen Occupant 1 IPC 17.38.995 Type: Super- Color ■ Hidnet Unicosen Occupant 1 IPC 17.40.03 Type: Super- Color ■ Hidnet Unicosen Occupant 1 IPC 17.40.04 Type: Super- Color ■ Hidnet Unicosen Occupant 1 IPC 17.40.05 Type: Super- Color ■ Hidnet Unicosen

Point to one displayed panel, and the icons are displayed.

Figure 4-32 Icons
IPC 17:38:24 Type Two-whe... Color Helmet Unknown Occupancy 1

Table 4-7 Operation

Icon Operation
[0H6H]Select one by one: Click to select the panel.means the panel is selected.Select in batches: Select All to select all the panels on the page.
[X208]Click or double-click the panel to play back the video record (10 s before and after the snapshot).
[X94T]Click, or select the panel and then click to export picture, video, and excel file to specified saving path.

4.5 IVS

The IVS feature includes a number of behavior detections such as fence-crossing, intrusion, tripwire, parking, crowd gathering, missing object, abandoned object, and loitering. You can configure alarm notifications of those intelligent detections.

This section introduces how to configure the intelligent detections.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - IVS - 1

  • For the same camera, IVS and face detection cannot be enabled at the same time.
    • Some device models only support IVS by camera.

4.5.1 Enabling AI Plan

Enable AI plan when AI by Camera is used. See "4.1.1 Enabling AI Plan" to enable AI detect function.

4.5.2 Configuring IVS

4.5.2.1 Global Configuration

Configure global rules of IVS, including anti-disturbance and sensitivity settings.

Step 1 Click 🎨 or click + on the configuration page, and then select EVENT.

Step 2 In the device tree, select a camera.

Step 3 Select AI Plan > IVS > Global Config.

Figure 4-33 Global config
AI Fly Camera Rule Config Global Config Anti-disturbance Sensitivity 5 1. Draw an area, ->2. Draw three vertic... Calibration Ve...

Step 4 Configure anti-disturbance and sensitivity settings.

- Click □ to enable anti-disturbance function.

- Drag to adjust sensitivity.

Step 5 Calibrate horizontal and vertical scales.

1) Click to draw an area.

2) Click ☐ to draw three vertical lines, enter the actual length, and then click Calibration Verification.

3) Click ☐ to draw a horizontal line, enter the actual length, and then click Calibration Verification.

Step 6 Click Save.

4.5.2.2 Rule Configuration

Configure rules of IVS functions such as fence-crossing, tripwire, intrusion, abandoned object, parking detection, people gathering, object removed, and loitering. Different cameras support different functions.

Table 4-8 IVS functions description

Functions Description
Fence-crossingAlarm is triggered when a target is crossing the pre-defined fence.
TripwireAlarm is triggered when a target is crossing the pre-defined tripwire.
IntrusionAlarm is triggered when a target is entering, leaving, or appears in the detection area.
Abandoned ObjectAlarm is triggered when an object is left in the detection area and the existence time is longer than the threshold.
Missing ObjectAlarm is triggered when an object is removed from the detection area and not put back after the pre-defined time period.
Parking DetectionAlarm is triggered when a target remains still within a time period longer than the pre-defined time duration.
People GatheringAlarm is triggered when people gathering is detected or people density is larger than the threshold.
LoiteringAlarm is triggered when a target keeps loitering in a time period longer than the threshold. Alarm will be triggered again if the target stays in the detection area after the first alarm.

Take tripwire as the example. The configuration procedure is as follows.

Step 1 Click 🎨, or click + on the configuration page, and then select EVENT.

Step 2 Select remote device in the device tree on the left.

Step 3 Select AI Plan > IVS.

Figure 4-34 Add rules
+ Add Rule No. RuleName Rule Type Operate 0 15 32 35 Refresh Save Cancel

Step 4 Set tripwire rules.
1) Click Add Rule, and then select Tripwire.

Figure 4-35 Configuring tripwire detection rules
+ Add Rule No. RuleName Rule Type Operace 1 Rule1 Tripwire Click the mouse to draw the area. AI Recognition ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Deployment Time + Add Schedule Record | camera2 Refresh Save Cancel

2) Click □ to enable detection rule.

Click to delete detection rule.

3) Click to edit the tripwire line.

  • Drag ✗ to adjust position or length of the line.
  • Click ☐ or ☒ to set the directions. An alarm will be triggered only when the target crosses the line in the designated direction.
  • Click the white dot on the line to add a turning point. Drag ✗ at the turning point to adjust position or length.

4) Click min or max to set minimum size or maximum size of detection target.

System triggers an alarm once the detected target size is between the maximum size and the minimum size.

Step 5 (Optional) Set other requirements.

Table 4-9 IVS rules configuration requirements

Functions Description
Fence-crossingDraw 2 detection lines.Transparent fences such as iron fence are not supported.Extremely short walls (height lower than normal height) are not supported.
Tripwire Draw 1 detection line.
IntrusionDraw 1 detection line.With the abandoned object detection, a person or vehicle that stays still for a long time will also trigger an alarm; if the object is smaller than human or vehicle, you can set the target size to filter out people and cars, or extend the minimum lasting duration to avoid false alarms caused by short dwell of people.For the crowd gathering detection, if the installation height is too low, human body size will take a large proportion in the image, or the camera view might be blocked. That might result in false alarms caused by continuous shaking of the camera, shaking leaves, frequent door opening and closing, and dense traffic of vehicles and people.
Abandoned Object
Missing Object
Parking Detection
Crowd Gathering
Loitering

Step 6 Set AI Recognition.

After setting AI recognition, when the system detects a person, vehicle or non-motor vehicle, a rule box will appear beside the target on the video.

1) Click □ to enable AI recognition function.

Figure 4-36 Type
AI Recognition ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

2) Select a recognition type.

• is to recognize human, and is to recognize vehicle.
- After enabling AI recognition function, at least one recognition type shall be selected.

Step 7 Click Deployment Time to select schedule from the drop-down list.

After setting deployment period, system triggers corresponding operations when there is a motion detection alarm in the specified period.

  • Click View Schedule to view detailed schedule settings.
  • If the schedule is not added or the added schedule does not meet actual needs, click Add Schedule.

Step 8 Click Actions to set alarm action. See "6.4.1 Alarm Actions" for detailed information.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Rule Configuration - 4

Repeat Step 4-Step 8 to add multiple detection rules. You can add max. 10 detection rules at the same time.

Step 9 Click Save.

4.5.3 Live View of IVS

On the LIVE page, view real-time IVS results.

4.5.3.1 Setting AI Display

Set the display rules of detection results.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Setting AI Display - 1

Make sure that view is created before setting AI display. To create view, see "5.1.1 View Management".

Step 1 Select a view from LIVE > View > View Group.

Step 2 Click , and then select the Human or Vehicle tab.

Figure 4-37 Human
View1 IPC Face Human Vehicle Non-Motor Vehicle Show Tracking Box: Time Top Color Sleeve L... Bottom ... Bottom ... Human Detection Time Human Detection Features Panel: Transparency: 10 Top Color Sleeve Length Bottom Color Bottom Type Hat Bag Age Gender Umbrella Hair Style Direction Hold a Baby Sync from AI-Dis. Apply to all win OK Cancel

Figure 4-38 Vehicle
View1 Face Human Vehicle Non-Motor Vehicle 16 Show Tracking Box: Time Plate No. Type Color Logo Vehicle Detection Features Panel: Transparence: 10 Plate No. Plate Color Color Type Logo Calling Seatbelt Ornament Region Sync from AI-Dis. Apply to all win OK Cancel

Step 3 Click next to Show Tracking Box.

Step 4 Configure feature panel.

1) Click next to Features Panel to enable feature panel.

A features panel is displayed on the right side of the video when a target that meets the conditions is detected.

2) Click □ to select the panel type, for example, the Human Detection tab.

3) (Optional) Drag to adjust the transparency of panel. The higher the value, the more transparent the panel.

4) (Optional) Select the features to be displayed in the panel.

• Up to 4 features can be displayed.

- 4 features are selected by default. To select another feature, click the selected feature to cancel it, and then click the feature to be displayed.

Step 5 Click OK.

4.5.3.2 Live View

Go to the LIVE interface, enable view, and then Device displays view video.

- When a target triggers cross line or cross region rule, the line or region frame in the view flickers in red.

- After setting AI recognition, when the system detects a person or vehicle, a rule frame will appear beside the person and vehicle in the view.

- There is a feature panel on the right side of the video window.

Figure 4-39 Live
Rule Box Feature Panel 14:31:50 Gender - Age - Glasses - Mask - Face Detection 468 14:31:46 Record Type - H. Cross RegionDetection 467 14:31:43 Record Type - H. Cross LineDetection 14:30:51 Gender - Age - Glasses - Mask - Face Detection

Point to features panel, and the operation icons are displayed. Click 📋 or double-click the detected image, so the system starts to play back the recorded videos (10 s before and after the snapshot).

4.5.3.3 Detection Statistics

On the LIVE page, click 🎯. The PEOPLE TOTAL page is displayed. Click 🎯, and then select IVS. The people detection records are displayed.

Figure 4-40 People total
PEOPLE TOTAL IPC 2018-11-20 10:00.26 Record Type e Human IPC 2018-11-20 10:00.24 Record Type e Human IPC 2018-11-20 09:59.12 Record Type e Human IPC 2018-11-20 09:58.06 Record Type e Human CrossRegionDetection CrossRegionDetection CrossRegionDetection CrossRegionDetection

Click 📄. The VEHICLE TOTAL page is displayed. Click 🔒, and then select IVS. The detected vehicles are displayed.

Figure 4-41 Vehicle total
VEHICLE TOTAL 4E05619VAJF39... 2018-11-30 14:43:04 4E05619VAJF39...2018-11-30 14:43:04 4E05619VAJF39...2018-11-30 14:43:04 4E05619VAJF39...2018-11-30 14:43:04 Record Type MotorVehicle CrossRegionDetection CrossRegionDetection CrossRegionDetection CrossRegionDetection

  • Point to a picture and click 📋, or double-click the picture, so the system starts playing back video (10 s before and after the snapshot moment).
  • Point to a picture and click 📋 to export video.

On the LIVE page, click 📁. The NONMOTOR TOTAL page is displayed. Click 📋, and then select IVS. The detected non-motor vehicles are displayed.

  • Point to a picture and click 📋, or double-click the picture, so the system starts playing back video (10 s before and after the snapshot moment).
  • Point to a picture and click 📋 to export video.

Search for IVS records.

Step 1 Click + and then select AI SEARCH > IVS.

Figure 4-42 IVS
Start/End Search Results Event Type All 2013 - 04 - 20 00 - 50 00 2013 - 04 - 20 23 - 19 50 Case Search Range: 30 minutes No search results ENDS No search results

Step 2 Select the remote device, and set event type and time.

Step 3 Click Query.

Figure 4-43 Search result
2018-11-30 Total 12 months Object Ty: Human Object Ty: Human Object Ty: Human Object Ty: Human Object Ty: Human Object Ty: Human Object Ty: Human Object Ty: Human Object Ty: Human Object Ty: Human Object Ty: Human Object Ty: Human Object Ty: Human Object Ty: Human Object Ty: Human Object Ty: Human Object Ty: Human Object Ty: Human Object Ty: Human Object Ty: Human Object Ty: Human Object Ty: Human Object Ty: Human Object Ty: Human Object Ty: Human Object Ty: Human Object Ty: Human Object Ty: Human Object Ty: Human Object Ty: Human Object Ty: Human Object Ty: Human Object Ty: Human Object Ty: Human Object Ty: Human Object Ty: Human Object Ty: Human Object Ty: Human Object Ty: Human Object Ty: Human Object Ty: Natural Object Ty: Natural Object Ty: Natural Object Ty: Natural Object Ty: Natural Object Ty: Natural Object Ty: Natural Object Ty: Natural Object Ty: Natural Object Ty: Natural Object Ty: Natural Object Ty: Natural Object Ty: Natural Object Ty: Natural Object Ty: Natural Object Ty: Natural Object Ty: Natural Object Ty: Natural Object Ty: Natural Object Ty: Natural Object Ty: Nural Object Ty: Nural Object Ty: Nural Object Ty: Nural Object Ty: Nural Object Ty: Nural Object Ty: Nural Object Ty: Nural Object Ty: Nural Object Ty: Nural Object Ty: Nural Object Ty: Nural Object Ty: Nural Object Ty: Nural Object Ty: Nural Object Ty: Nural Object Ty: Nural Object Ty:Nural

Click the panel. The following operation icons are displayed.

Table 4-10 More operations

Name Operation
Select a panelSelect one by one: Move the mouse onto the panel. Click □ to select the panel. ≈ means it is selected.Click ALL to select all the panels.
PlaybackClick the panel, and click ▶ or double-click the panel. The system starts to play back the recorded videos (10 s before and after the snapshot).
Export fileClick the panel and click ▶, or click the panel and click ↗ to export images, videos and Excel to designated storage path.▲After setting alarm linkage snapshot, during exporting images, the system exports detected images and panoramic images at the time of snapshot.

4.6 Vehicle Recognition

Alarm is triggered when vehicle property that meets detection rule is detected.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Vehicle Recognition - 1

EVS supports only vehicle recognition through AI by Camera. Make sure that the vehicle recognition parameters of camera are configured. For details, see the user's manual of the camera.

4.6.1 Enabling AI Plan

Before using AI by Camera, AI plan needs to be enabled first. For details, see "4.1.1 Enabling AI Plan".

4.6.2 Setting Vehicle Recognition

Set the deployment time of vehicle recognition and alarm linkage event.

Step 1 Click 🎨 or + , and then select EVENT.

Step 2 Select device from the device tree at the left side.

Step 3 Select AI Plan > Vehicle Recognition.

Figure 4-44 Vehicle recognition
AI By Camera Enabled 501.419 2008 OK! IPO Deployment Time + Vives Schedule + Add Schedule + Actions Refresh Save Cancel

Step 4 Click the Deployment Time drop-down list to select schedule.

EVS links alarm event when alarm is triggered within the defined schedule.

  • Click View Schedule to view detailed schedule settings.
  • If the schedule is not added or the added schedule does not meet actual needs, click Add Schedule. For details, see "6.9.3 Schedule".

Step 5 Click Actions to set alarm action. For details, see "6.4.1 Alarm Actions".

Step 6 Click Save.

4.6.3 Live View of Vehicle Recognition

View vehicle recognition results on the LIVE page.

4.6.3.1 Setting AI Display

Set the display rules of detection results.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Setting AI Display - 1

Make sure that view is created before setting AI display. To create view, see "5.1.1 View Management".

Step 1 Select a view from LIVE > View > View Group.

Step 2 Click , and then select Vehicle tab.

Figure 4-45 Motor vehicle
View1 Face Human Vehicle Non-Motor Vehicle 16 Show Tracking Box: Time Plate No. Type Color Logo Vehicle Detection Features Panel: Transparence: 10 Plate No. Plate Color Color Type Logo Calling Seatbelt Ornament Region Sync from AI-Dis. Apply to all win OK Cancel

Step 3 Click next to Show Tracking Box to enable tracking box function.

A tracking box is displayed in the video image when target meeting detection rule is detected. Step 4 Set features panel.

1) Click □ next to Features Panel to enable features panel function.

Features panel will be displayed at the right side of video image when target with selected features is detected.

2) Select the Vehicle Detection panel type by clicking ☐. √ means the panel is selected.

3) (Optional) Drag to adjust the transparency of panel. The higher the value, the more transparent the panel.

4) (Optional) Select the features to be displayed in the panel.

• Up to 4 features can be displayed.

- 4 features are selected by default. To select another feature, click the selected feature to cancel it, and then click the feature to be displayed.

Step 5 Click OK.

4.6.3.2 Live View

On the LIVE page, select a view, and the video image of the view is displayed.

  • Tracking box is displayed in the video image.
    ● Features panel is displayed at the right side of the video image.

Figure 4-46 Live
Rule box Features panel 15:02:03 Plate : AY Type : Unknown Color : Logo : Unknown Vehicle recognition 15:02:03 Plate : Type : Unknown Color : Logo : Unknown Vehicle recognition 15:02:03 Plate : A2C781 Type : Unknown Color : Logo : Unknown Vehicle recognition

Move the mouse pointer to the features panel, and then you can click 📋 or double-click the vehicle image to play back the video image (10 s before and after the snapshot).

4.6.3.3 Detection Statistics

On the LIVE page, select a view and then click 📄. The VEHICLE TOTAL page is displayed.

Click 📋, and then select Vehicle Detection. The information of detected vehicles is displayed.

Figure 4-47 Vehicle detection
VEHICLE TOTAL camera1 2019-04-16 11:31:19 Type Vehicle camera1 2019-04-16 11:31:18 Type Vehicle camera1 2019-04-16 11:31:18 Type Vehicle camera1 2019-04-16 11:31:12 Type Vehicle CrossRegionDetection CrossRegionDetection CrossRegionDetection CrossRegionDetection 0 12661 108462 5687

- Move the mouse pointer to the information panel, and then click 📋 or double-click the picture to play back the video image (10 s before and after the snapshot).

- Move the mouse pointer to the information panel, and then click 📋 to export the video to specified saving path.

4.6.4 Searching for Detection Information

Set event type and vehicle properties, and then search vehicle detection information. For details, see "4.4.4.2 Vehicle Search".

4.7 Crowd Distribution Map

View and monitor people crowd to avoid crowd incidents, for example, stampede.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Crowd Distribution Map - 1

This function is only available with AI by Camera.

4.7.1 Enabling AI Plan

Enable the corresponding AI plan before using AI by Camera functions. For details, see "4.1.1 Enabling AI Plan".

4.7.2 Configuring Crowd Distribution Map

Set crowd distribution alarm rules.

4.7.2.1 Global Configuration

Draw lines on the image to determine the geographical scale of the image.

Step 1

Click

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Global Configuration - 1

or click

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Global Configuration - 2

on the configuration page, and then select EVENT.

Step 2

In the device tree, select a camera.

Step 3

Select AI Plan > Crowd Distribution Map > Global Config.

Figure 4-48 Global config
AI By Camera Rule Config Global Config 1. Draw an area, ->2. Draw three vertical lines and one horizontal line. Actual Length 1 m

Step 4 Draw lines. Draw one horizontal line and three vertical lines.

  • Click ☐, draw vertical lines, and then enter their geographical distance values.
  • Click , draw a horizontal line, and then enter the geographical distance value.

Step 5 Click Save.

4.7.2.2 Rule Configuration

Configure the alarm threshold for crowd monitoring. For example, when the crowd density reaches 8, an alarm is triggered.

Step 1 Click 🎨 or click + on the configuration page, and then select EVENT.

Step 2 In the device tree, select a camera.

Step 3 Select AI Plan > Crowd Distribution Map > Rule Config.

Step 4 Click next to Enabled to enable rule configuration.

Step 5 Set detection rules.

  • Set regional detection rules.
    1) Click Add Rule. The following page is displayed.

Figure 4-49 Add Rules
All By Camera Enabled Rule Config: Global Config Add Rule No. Area Alaws People No. Operate 1 Area1 20 Global Crowd Density 4 People/lf (2-10) Deployment Time: Schedule1 + Add Schedule Record | IPC2 Log | Enable Actions Refresh Save Cancel

2) Drag ✗ to adjust the size.

3) Configure alarm threshold. Alarm is triggered when the detected people number reaches the threshold.

- Set global alarm.

1) Click , and then drag ✗ to adjust the size of the yellow area.

2) Click □ to enable global detection.

3) Set crowd density. Alarm is triggered when the detected crowd density reaches the threshold.

Step 6 Select a schedule from the Deployment Time drop-down list.

The alarm linkage action is triggered only during the scheduled period.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Rule Configuration - 2

To modify the schedule, click Add Schedule.

Step 7 Click Actions, and then select an action to be associated to the alarm.

Step 8 Click Save.

4.7.3 Live View of Crowd Distribution

On the LIVE page, open a view that contains the crowd distribution detection camera.

The video shows people numbers in the detection areas in real time. The area frame flashes red when there is an alarm in the area.

Figure 4-50 Live view of crowd distribution
Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Live View of Crowd Distribution - 1

natural_image Street scene with pedestrians near a modern bus stop and sidewalk, no visible text or symbols
  • Right-click on the live video, and then select Crowd Distribution Map > PIP. A blue section is displayed, and it shows the crowd distribution status inside the current view.
  • Right-click on the live video, and then select Crowd Distribution Map > Global to switch to the distribution view. The view indicates crowd density and people heads in different colors.

4.8 Call Alarm

An alarm is triggered when the system detects a person calling. To configure call alarm, set call detection rules for the visible light channel of a thermal camera.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Call Alarm - 1

Call alarm is only available with AI by Camera.

4.8.1 Enabling AI Plan

Enable the corresponding AI plan before using AI by Camera functions. For details, see "6.2.1 Enabling AI Plan".

4.8.2 Configuring Call Alarm

Configure call alarm rules.

Step 1 Click 🎨 or click + on the configuration page, and then select EVENT.

Step 2 In the device tree, select the visible light channel of a thermal camera.

Step 3 Select AI Plan > Call Alarm.

Step 4 Click next to Enabled to enable rule configuration.

Figure 6-106 Configure call alarm
AI By Camera Enabled Preset 1 Click the mouse to draw the area. Sensitivity 10 Min Duration 1 Second (1- 600) Deployment Time Default Schedule Add Schedule » Record | Log | Enable + Actions

Step 5 Click and drag ✗ to adjust the size of the detection area (yellow area).

Step 6 Set Sensitivity and Min Duration.

  • Sensitivity: The higher the Sensitivity is, the easier the call action is detected.
  • Min Duration: The minimum duration the call action lasts. If the call action still lasts after the Min Duration, the system will trigger an alarm.

Step 7 Click Deployment Time to select a schedule from the drop-down list.

System triggers corresponding alarm actions only during the alarm deployment period.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Configuring Call Alarm - 2

You can select an existing schedule from the Deployment Time drop-down list. You can also add a new schedule. For details, see "8.9.4 Schedule".

Step 8 Click Action to set alarm action. See "8.4.1 Alarm Actions" for detailed information.

4.8.3 Live View of Call Alarm

Log in to PCAPP. On the LIVE page, open a view that contains the call alarm detection channel. The call action is highlighted in red when the alarm is triggered.

Figure 6-107 Live view of call alarm
2020-06-20 15:23:40

4.9 Smoking Alarm

An alarm is triggered when the system detects a person smoking. To configure smoking alarm, set smoking detection rules for the visible light channel of a thermal camera.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Smoking Alarm - 1

Smoking alarm is only available with AI by Camera.

4.9.1 Configuring Smoking Alarm

Configure smoking alarm rules.

Step 1 Click 🎨 or click + on the configuration page, and then select EVENT.

Step 2 In the device tree, select the visible light channel of a thermal camera.

Step 3 Select AI Plan > Smoking Alarm.

Step 4 Click next to Enabled to enable rule configuration.

Figure 6-109 Configure smoking alarm
AI By Camera Enabled Preset 1 Click the mouse to draw the area. Sensitivity 10 Min Duration 1 Second (1- 600) Deployment Time Default Schedule Add Schedule » Record | Log | Enable + Actions

Step 5 Click and drag ✗ to adjust the size of the detection area (yellow area).

Step 6 Set Sensitivity and Min Duration.

  • Sensitivity: The higher the Sensitivity is, the easier the call action is detected.
  • Min Duration: The minimum duration the call action lasts. If the call action still lasts after the Min Duration, the system will trigger an alarm.

Step 7 Click Deployment Time to select a schedule from the drop-down list.

System triggers corresponding alarm actions only during the alarm deployment period.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Configuring Smoking Alarm - 2

You can select an existing schedule from the Deployment Time drop-down list. You can also add a new schedule. For details, see "8.9.4 Schedule".

Step 8 Click Actions to set alarm action. See "8.4.1 Alarm Actions" for detailed information.

4.9.2 Live View of Smoking Alarm

Log in to PCAPP. On the LIVE page, open a view that contains the smoking alarm detection channel. The smoking action is highlighted in red when the alarm is triggered.

5 General Operations

This chapter introduces general operations such as live view, playback, alarm, AI functions, and IVS.

5.1 Live and Monitor

Click +, and then select LIVE. The LIVE page is displayed.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Live and Monitor - 1

Move the mouse pointer to the middle of video window and left column. is displayed. Click the

icon to hide the left column. See Figure 5-2.

Figure 5-1 Live (1)
View 1 View2 View1 View2 View3 View4 View5 View6 View7 View8 View9 Resources Smart Device Name: IP 416 PTZ 1699 8064 24547 3993 4 5 6

Figure 5-2 Live (2)
2018-11-22 09:07:29 09:07:25 ClearColor ClearShower Red Color Bedroom Trouserm Human Detection 09:07:25 ClearColor ClearShower Red Color Red Color Human Detection 2018-11-22 09:07:29 0 111460 20054 64777

Table 5-1 Live page description

No. Description
1View zone. Displays the created view and view group. See "5.1.1 View Management" for detailed information.
2Resource pool. Displays the added remote device list.
3 PTZ zone.
4Smart preview icons. View face statistics, person statistics, IVS statistics and AI display.
5Video play window. See "5.1.1.3 View Window".
6Click to take snapshot.Click for full-screen view.Click to go to theVIDEO RECORDINGpage for recording configuration.

5.1.1 View Management

View is composed of video images of several remote devices. Go to the view panel at the upper-left corner of the LIVE page to view or call the view. See Figure 5-3.

  • System has created views by default. Create view or view group under the View.
  • Double-click a view or drag the view to the play panel on the right side. Device begins playing the real-time video from the remote device.

- Click ☐ to select views and its sub-node.

Figure 5-3 View
View View Group View 1 View 2

5.1.1.1 View Group

View group is a group of views. The view group allows you to categorize and manage view. It is easy for you to search and find the view. Create view or view group under the View.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - View Group - 1

• Device supports maximum 100 view groups.

- The views hierarchy shall not be more than 2. For example, after you create View Group 1 under View, you can create a sub-level View Group 2 under View Group 1. However, you cannot create sub-level group under View Group 2.

Procedure

Step 1 Follow the steps listed below to create a view group.

  • Click View Group or a created view group, and then click
  • Right-click View Group or a created view group, and then select Add View Group. System creates one view group.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Procedure - 1

Figure 5-4 Create view group
View View Group View Group1 View Group2 View Group3 View1 View2 View3 View4

Step 2 Set view group name.

  • The view group name ranges from 1 to 64 characters. It can contain English letters, numbers and special characters.
  • View group is to classify different view groups. We recommend the view group name shall be easy to recognize.

Step 3 Click any blank space on the page.

Device pops up a prompt of success.

After creating view group, view group can be renamed or deleted. See Table 5-2 for detailed information.

Table 5-2 View group

Name Operation
Rename view groupSelect a view group and then click. Set view group name and click any spare panel.Right-click view group and selectRename.See Figure 5-5. Set view group name and click any spare panel.
Delete View groupOnce you delete view group, all views under current view group will be deleted at the same time. Please be careful!Select view group and clickRight-click view group and then selectDelete.

Figure 5-5 Rename
View View Group View 1 Open Edit Rename Delete

5.1.1.2 View

View is a video component of several remote devices. You can drag several remote devices to the same view and when view function is enabled, you can view the real-time video from several remote devices at the same time.

5.1.1.2.1 Creating View

Creating view is to add several associated remote devices to the same View. It is easy to view the real-time video from several remote devices at the same time.

Preparation

Remote device has been added. See "3.4.2 Adding Remote Device" for detailed information.

Create View

Step 1 Follow the steps listed below to create view.

  • Select a view group, click 📄, and then select Add view.
    • Right-click a view group, and then select Add view.

Figure 5-6 Edit view (1)
View View Group View1 View2 View3 Resources SearchDevice Name/IP JH05A23YAJ03481 Device 100A077E1000000 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 Access RTSP Media PTZ View4 OK Cancel

Step 2 Double-click a remote device in resource pool, or drag the remote device to the right panel. After one remote device is added, layout grid is displayed.

  • Each layout grid supports one remote device. If you want to add several remote devices, drag the rest remote device to other idle layout grid.
  • If the layout grid has added the remote device, drag another remote device to current grid to replace the original one.

- Move the mouse pointer to the orange panel (such as 📄) of the view window, click the view window, and then drag after you see the arrow icon to adjust view window size.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Create View - 2

  • Device automatically creates the view grids amount according to the selected remote device amount. Device supports maximum 36 view windows.
  • The view window fills in the whole layout grid by default. Right-click to select Original Scale > ON, and turn on the Original Scale. The device automatically adjusts view window size according to resolution of remote device.
  • When adjusting view window position, drag the view window to the layout grid of the green background color. You cannot drag the view window to the grid of red background color.

Figure 5-7 Edit view (2)
Rule4 View6 OK Cancel

Step 3 Set view name.
The view name ranges from 1 to 64 characters. It can contain English letters, number and special character.
Step 4 Click OK to save the configuration.
Device pops up a prompt of Successfully operated.

After creating view, view can be edited, enabled, renamed or deleted.

Table 5-3 View

Name Operation
Edit ViewEdit remote device in the view, window layout and view name. See "5.1.1.2.2 Editing View" for detailed information.
Enable viewAfter enabling view, view real-time image of remote device in the view. See "5.1.1.2.3 Enabling view" for detailed information.
Rename viewSelect a view group and then click . Set view group name and click any spare panel.Right-click view and select Rename. See Figure 5-8. Set view name and click any spare panel.
Delete viewDelete: Select a view and then click , or right-click view and then select Delete.Batch delete: Click , select views you want to delete and then click.

Figure 5-8 Menu

View View Group Open Edit Rename Delete

5.1.1.2.2 Editing View

In edit view mode, you can perform the following functions:

- Add, or delete the remote device on the view.

- Adjust the view grid display.

- Modify view name.

Step 1 Right-click a view and then select Edit.

Figure 5-9 Edit view
Street photo with visible store signboards and a group of people in a warehouse or garage setting.

Step 2 Edit view as you require.

- Add remote device: Double-click remote device in the resource pool, or drag the remote device to the free layout grid on the right panel.

- Delete remote device: Point to window on the right, and click ✗ at the upper-right corner.

- Move window position: Select and hold on a view window, move it to the proper position and release mouse.

- Change window position: Select and hold on one view window and then drag to another view window.

- Change window size: Move your mouse to the orange panel on the window (such as

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Editing View - 2

Hold and drag the view window after you see the arrow icon.

- Modify view name: Set view name on View1

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Editing View - 3

When adjusting view window position, drag the view window to the layout grid of the green background color. You cannot drag the view window to the grid of red background color.

Step 3 Click OK to save the configuration.

Device pops up successfully operated.

5.1.1.2.3 Enabling view

Right-click the view and select Open, or double-click view. The view window is displayed.

Figure 5-10 View window
2018-11-22 09.07.29 09.07.26 CarColor Countless Rust Color Button Trussam Human Detention 09.07.26 CarColor Countless Rust Color Button Trussam Human Detention 2018-11-22 09.07.29 0 111460 20054 64777

When enabling the view, you can change video position, zoom video window.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Enabling view - 2

- When adjusting view window position, drag the view window to the layout grid of the green background color. You cannot drag the view window to the grid of red background color.

- Point to view window. Window task column is displayed to snapshot, enable record and turn off view window. See "5.1.1.3.1 Window Task Column" for detailed information.

- Right-click view window, you can switch bit streams, set digital zoom. See "5.1.1.3.2 Shortcut Menu" for detailed information.

Table 5-4 View function

Name Description
Exchange window positionPress one view window and drag it to another view window to exchange these view window position.The exchanging window position operation is valid only once. Disable and then enable view again, the view window restores original position. If you want to change view window position permanently, go to the view edit mode to set. See "5.1.1.2.2 Editing View" for detailed information.
Zoom in video window● Once current view window amount is too much (more than 9), click one view window, device displays current view window at the center of the window in the zoom in mode. Click any other blank position, you can view window restores original size.● Double-click a view window, device displays view window at one window. Double-click view window again or click any blank position, the view window restores original size.
Add view windowIn the resource pool, double-click the remote device or drag the remote device to the right panel, you can add remote device to current view.Drag the remote device to the view window to replace the original remote device.The modified view layout is valid only for once if you do not click OK. Close and enable view again, the view layout restores original layout.
Close view windowPoint to one view window, click × to close the view window.Close view window, device automatically adjusts view layout according to the rest remote device amount and play panel free space.

5.1.1.3 View Window

Right-click the view, select Open, or double-click view. The view window is displayed.

Figure 5-11 View window
2018-11-22 09:07:29 09:07:25 Clear Color Clear Short Bad. Color Bedroom Tracuum Human Detection 09:07:26 Clear Color Clear Short Bad. Color Badroom Tracuum Human Detection 2018-11-22 07:29 0 111460 20054 64777

5.1.1.3.1 Window Task Column

Point to view window. The icons are displayed.

Figure 5-12 View window
2019-04-25 08:29:02 17 3m25s 3m25s 3m24s 3m24s 3m24s 3m24s 3m24s 3m24s 3m24s 3m24s 3m24s 3m24s 3m24s 3m24s 3m24s 3m24s 3m24s 3m24s 3m24s 3n25s 3n25s 3n25s 3n25s 3n25s 3n25s 3n25s 3n25s 3n25s 3n25s 3n25s 3n25s 3n25s 3n25s 3n25s 3n25s 3n25s 3m25s 3m25s 3m25s 3m25s 3m25s 3m25s 3m25s 3m25s 3m25s 3m25s 3m25s 3m25s 3m25s 3m25s 3m25s 3m25s 3m25s

Table 5-5 Window task column

Name Description
Open Manual Video RecordingClickto start recording manually. Now the icon becomes. Clickstop recording.System stops recording according to the manual record length settings if you donot click again to stop.At different interfaces, recording storage path varies.Local ConfigurationsWhen USB storage device is connected, recordings are saved in USB storage device.Otherwise, the recordings are saved in the Device. Query or export manual recording by playback control. See "5.2.1 Playing Back Recorded Video" for detailed information.Operate PCAPP.Default storage path of recording is C:/Program Files (x86)/EVS/video. Set storage path.
SnapshotClicksnapshot.At different interfaces, snapshot storage path varies.Local ConfigurationsWhen USB storage device is connected, snapshots are saved in USB storage device.Otherwise, the snapshots are saved in the Device. Query or export the snapshots by playback control. See "5.2.3 Playing Back Snapshots" for detailed information.Operate PCAPP.Default storage path of snapshot is C:/Program Files (x86)/EVS/pictures. Set storage path.
Close view windowClickto close view window.

5.1.1.3.2 Shortcut Menu

Right-click the view window. The shortcut menu is displayed.

Figure 5-13 Shortcut menu
2019-03-30 13:20:12 Stream Bite Rate Original Scale Audio Smart Tracking Crowd Distrib...

Table 5-6 Shortcut menu

ParametersDescription
StreamSet current window stream. It includes main stream/sub stream 1/sub stream 2.
Bit rateDisplays real-time bit rate on the window or not. See Figure 5-14.
Original ScaleSet video window scale.ON: System automatically adjusts video window scale according to the resolution.OFF: System automatically adjusts video window scale according to the remote device amount and the free space on the playback panel.
AudioSet audio output. It includes audio 1, audio 2, mixing and off.
Fisheye DewarpSet instalaltion methods and display modes of fisheye cameras. For details, see "5.1.1.3.4 Fisheye Dewarp".Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Shortcut Menu - 2This function is only available on fisheye camera.
Smart trackingIntelligently track targets. For details, see "5.1.1.3.5 Smart Tracking".Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Shortcut Menu - 3This function is only available on the multi-sensor panoramic camera + PTZ camera.
Crowd distributionShow people numbers and distribution status. For details, see "4.7.3 Live View of Crowd Distribution".Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Shortcut Menu - 4This function is only available on the camera that supports crowd distribution.

Figure 5-14 View window
IP PTZ Camera: $20x1080 25fps@ 4131Kbps 2017 16:24 20:14:55 星期 REC Camera

5.1.1.3.3 Digital Zoom

The digital zoom function allows you to zoom in a specified zone to view the video details.

Log in to PCAPP, double-click a view to open it, and then enable digital zoom through either of the following methods:

  • Click the view, scroll the mouse to zoom in or zoom out.
  • Click Ⓧ, and then select a zone you want to zoom in on the video window.

Figure 5-15 Digital zoom:
Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Digital Zoom - 1

natural_image Street scene with a parked car and bicycles under trees, no visible text or symbols

5.1.1.3.4 Fisheye Dewarp

Set the installation method and display mode of fisheye cameras.

• Installation method: Select the installation method according to the actual situation.
- Display mode: Select the display mode of live view.

Step 1 Right-click on the live video, and then select Fisheye Dewarp.

Figure 5-16 Fisheye dewarp
2019-04-26 05:00 U时钟 33:21 17

Step 2 Select an installation method.

  • Click to select ceiling mount.
  • Click to select wall mount.
  • Click to select ground mount.

Step 3 Select a display mode.

Table 5-7 Display mode

Installation MethodDisplay Mode Description
Ceiling/wall/ground mountDahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Fisheye Dewarp - 2The original fisheye image.
Ceiling/ ground mountDahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Fisheye Dewarp - 3 1P+1Corrected 360°panoramic image + section images.
Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Fisheye Dewarp - 4 2P2 corrected 180°images, which consist the 360° panoramic image.
Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Fisheye Dewarp - 5 1+3Original image + 3 section images.
Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Fisheye Dewarp - 6 1+4Original image + 4 section images.
Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Fisheye Dewarp - 7 1P+6Corrected 360°panoramic image + section images.
Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Fisheye Dewarp - 8 1+8Original image + 8 section images.
Wall mountDahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Fisheye Dewarp - 9 1PCorrected 180° image from left to right.
Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Fisheye Dewarp - 10 1P+3Corrected 180° image + 3 section images.
Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Fisheye Dewarp - 11 1P+4Corrected 180° image + 4 section images.
Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Fisheye Dewarp - 12 1P+8Corrected 180° image + 8 section images.

Step 4 Click OK.

5.1.1.3.5 Smart Tracking

Track targets manually or automatically. This function is only available on the multi-sensor panoramic camera + PTZ camera.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Smart Tracking - 1

Make sure that the linked tracking function has been enabled.

Step 1 Right-click on the live video, and then select Smart Tracking > ON.

Figure 5-17 Smart tracking
View View Group View1 View2 Resources 45.20 456 Device 4K02337YAJ1F1AE IPC Access RTSP Media Auto Track PTZ 211 1574 0

Step 2 Select the tracking method.

  • Manual positioning: Click a spot or select a zone on the bullet camera video, and then the PTZ camera will automatically rotates there and zoom in.
  • Manual tracking: Click or select a target on the bullet camera video, and then the PTZ camera automatically rotates and tracks it.
  • Automatic tracking: The tracking action is automatically triggered by alarms in according to the pre-defined rules.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Smart Tracking - 3

For automatic tracking, make sure that you have set intrusion detection or tripwire rules for the camera. For details, see "4.5.2 Configuring IVS".

5.1.1.3.6 Thermal

On the LIVE interface, a thermal camera has 2 channels: Visible light channel and thermal channel. Select the thermal channel, point to any position on the live video, and then you can view the real-time temperature of the position.

Figure 5-18 Thermal 2019-09-21 15:26:43 31.5°C 1

5.1.1.3.7 Talk

The Talk function enables voice interaction between the Device and remote devices, improving the efficiency in handling emergency events.

Step 1 Log in to PCAPP.

Step 2 Open a view on the Live page.

Figure 7-19 Talk
Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Talk - 1

natural_image Interior view of a modern building with large windows and minimal furniture, captured in a circular frame (no visible text or symbols)

Step 3 Click ☐ at the upper-right corner of the view window to enable the Talk function. Click again to disable the function.

5.1.2 Resources Pool

The resource pool displays the added remote device list. The system automatically divides into groups according to device type.

Figure 5-19 Resources pool
Resources IVSS Device IPC IP PTZ Camera 1 TPC Access RTSP Media

Table 5-8 Resources pool description

Operation Description
Search deviceInput keywords at , device displays the corresponding remote devices.Support fuzzy search.
Filter deviceClick ▼ and then select all, online, offline to filter the disqualified remote device.
View device statusDisplay remote device status on the resources pool.If the remote device name and icon is black, it means the remote device is online. For example, IP PTZ CameraIf the remote device name and icon is gray, it means the remote device is offline. For example, IPCIf there is an icon ▲ before the remote device, it means remote device is abnormal, alarming, and so on. Point to ▲ to view the detailed information.
Mouse OperationsPoint to the remote device name, you can view remote device IP address and port number.On the Device list, click one remote device and then press Ctrl, click other remote device, you can select several remote devices at the same time.On the Device list, select one remote device and then press Shift, click other remote device, select current two remote devices and all remote devices listed between them.Right-click a remote device to connect to disconnect it.Double-click remote device or drag the remote device to the view window on the right panel, you can enter edit view page. Edit the view. See "5.1.1.2.2 Editing View" for detailed information.

5.1.3 PTZ

Set PTZ functions and perform PTZ control so the PTZ camera can rotate accordingly to monitor all directions.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - PTZ - 1

The PTZ functions might vary depending on the Device models.

Log in to the PCAPP. On the LIVE page, PTZ is displayed at the lower-left corner.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - PTZ - 2

The following figure is for reference only. The grey button means that the current function is not supported.

Figure 7-21 PTZ
PTZ SPEED MAX MIN OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON

Table 7-10 PTZ Icons

Icons Description
[T66Y]Press and hold on, and drag it up and down. The higher the value is, the faster the PTZ speed is.
Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - PTZ - 4Control PTZ movement in the following ways.Press and hold on to control PTZ top/bottom/left/right/upper-left/upper-right/lower-left/lower-right direction.Click the arrows to control PTZ direction.
Click to enable 3D positioning function.
[D20Y]Click to enable auto focus, and then the camera image becomes focused automatically.
Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - PTZ - 5Click to enter the PTZ menu mode. For details, see "7.1.3.1 PTZ Menu Settings".
Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - PTZ - 6Zoom. Click to adjust lens zoom rate of the remote device.
Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - PTZ - 7Focus. Click to adjust lens focus of the remote device.
[7OT8]Iris. Click it to adjust iris size of the remote device.
Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - PTZ - 8Click to use windshield wiper, light, IR and linear scan, auxiliary commands.: Drag the on/off slider to the left or right to enable or disable windshield wiper.: Drag the on/off slider to the left or right to enable or disable the light.: Drag the on/off slider to the left or right to enable or disable the IR.: Drag the on/off slider to the left or right to enable or disable linear scan.: Set the No. of auxiliary functions. Click to enable the corresponding auxiliary function.
[T269] Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - PTZ - 9Click to enter PTZ calling page.Go to the remote device to set corresponding PTZ function before you call it.Click to enter the preset page.Click to enter the cruise page. For details, see "7.1.3.2.2 Setting a Cruise".Click to enter the pattern page. For details, see "7.1.3.2.2 Setting a Cruise".

5.1.3.1 PTZ Menu Settings

Device displays PTZ main menu on the view window. The PTZ main menu enables you to perform camera settings, PTZ settings, system management, and more. You can use the direction and confirm buttons to set the remote device.

Step 1 Log in to PCAPP.

Step 2 Enable view and then select a remote device on the view.

Step 3 On PTZ panel, click 📋 to open the OSD menu.

Figure 7-22 PTZ menu page
View View Group View1 View2 View3 View4 View5 View6 IP PTZ Camera Camera PTZ System Exit (1/3) Resources PTZ SPEED HFX OK OFF ON

Table 7-11 PTZ menu description

Parameters Description
CameraSet remote device image parameters involving picture, exposure, backlight, WB, day and night, focus and zoom, defog, and default.
PTZSet remote device PTZ functions such as preset, cruise, scan, pattern, rotation, and PTZ restart.
SystemSet remote device PTZ simulator, restore default, manage remote device peripheral device, view remote device software version, PTZ version and more.
Exit Exit PTZ menu.

Step 4 Set PTZ menu parameters.

  • Click ▲ and ▼ to select options.
  • Click > or < to set parameters.
  • Click OK to confirm.

Step 5 Click ☐ to exit PTZ menu mode.

5.1.3.2 Configuring PTZ Functions

Control PTZ device to implement corresponding operations.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Configuring PTZ Functions - 1

The PTZ functions might vary depending on the Device models.

5.1.3.2.1 Setting a Preset

A preset is the saved information of a specific position, angle, and focal length of the PTZ camera. You can set a preset so that you can quickly adjust the PTZ to the desired position in the future.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to PCAPP.

Step 2 Select a PTZ camera from the views.

Step 3 On the PTZ panel, click .

Figure 7-23 Call a preset
001 Preset1

Step 4 Click the direction icons to rotate the camera to a specific position.

Step 5 Click +, enter the name of the new preset, and then click √ to save the preset.

Figure 7-24 Add a preset
001 Preset1 Preset2 ✓ ✗

Step 6 To call the preset, hover over the preset name, and then click ▶.

- Edit a preset:

To edit preset name, double-click the name. The camera rotates to the preset after the double-click.

To modify the preset position, select the preset, and then click ☑, rotate the camera to the desired position, and then click √

◇ To quit, click . ✗

• To delete a preset, select it and then click 📄.

• To refresh presets list, click ↻.

5.1.3.2.2 Setting a Cruise

A cruise is a sequential set of presets. After you call a cruise, the PTZ camera automatically rotates to the presets one by one at the pre-defined interval.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to PCAPP.

Step 2 Select a PTZ camera from the views.

Step 3 On the PTZ panel, click .

Step 4 Click +, enter the name of the new cruise, and then click √ to save.

Step 5 Click Add, select a cruise, and then click √.

Repeat this step to add multiple presets into the cruise.

Figure 7-25 Add a cruise
Cruise1 Add No. Preset Stay Time Operate 1 Preset1 15 s 2 Preset1 15 s ✓ ✗ Refresh

Step 6 To call the cruise, hover over the cruise name, and then click ▶. To stop the cruise, click ■.

- Edit a cruise:

To edit cruise name, double-click the name. To quit, click ✗.
To modify the cruise, select the cruise, and then click ☐, modify the settings, and then click √.

• To delete a cruise, select it and then click

• To refresh cruises list, click

5.1.3.2.3 Setting a Pattern

A pattern is a recorded series of PTZ operations such as pan, tilt, zoom and focusing. You call a pattern to let the camera repeat the corresponding operations.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to PCAPP.

Step 2 Select a PTZ camera from the views.

Step 3 On the PTZ panel, click.

Step 4 To start recording a pattern, double-click on a pattern name, click Start Record, perform a series of PTZ actions as desired, and then click Stop Record.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Procedure - 1

The maximum number of patterns depends on the camera capability. If not limited on the camera, you can config up to 5 patterns by default.

Figure 7-26 Call a pattern
001 Pattern 1 002 Pattern 2 003 Pattern 3 004 Pattern 4 005 Pattern 5 Start Record

Step 5 To call the pattern, hover over the pattern name, and then click ▶. To stop, click ■.

- Edit a pattern:

To modify the pattern, select the pattern, and then click . Click Start Record and record a new pattern, and then click Stop Record.

◇ To quit, click the pattern name.

• To delete a pattern, select it and then click

• To refresh patterns list, click

5.1.3.2.4 Setting Linear Scanning

In the linear scanning mode, the camera scans repeatedly to the pre-defined left and then right limit.

Step 1 Log in to PCAPP.

Step 2 Select a PTZ camera from the views.

Step 3 On the PTZ panel, click

Step 4 Select a linear scanning, and then double-click it or click ⚙. Rotate the PTZ to the left until you think it can be the left limit, and then click ◀ to save; rotate the PTZ to the right limit, and then click ▶I.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Setting Linear Scanning - 1

The maximum number of linear scannings depends on the camera capability. If not limited on the camera, you can config up to 5 scannings by default.

Figure 7-27 Set a linear scanning
001 Linear Scanning 1 002 Linear Scanning 2 003 Linear Scanning 3 004 Linear Scanning 4 005 Linear Scanning 5

Step 5 To call the linear scanning, hover over the name, and then click ▶. To stop, click ■.

5.1.3.2.5 Enabling Auxiliary Functions

Enable PTZ windshield wiper, light and IR.

Step 1 Log in to PCAPP.

Step 2 Select a PTZ camera from the views.

Step 3 On the PTZ panel, click .

Figure 7-28 Auxiliary functions
OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON

Step 4 Drag the slider to ON or OFF to enable or disable the function.

● : Windshield wiper. It is available on select models.
● Light. It is available on select models.
• : IR. It is available on select models.

5.2 Recorded Files

Search or play back the record file or image on the Device. At the same time, you can export record file or image to designated storage path.

5.2.1 Playing Back Recorded Video

Search and playback record file according to remote device, record type, and record time.

Step 1 Click + and then select SEARCH.

Figure 5-20 Search
Local Device SearchDevice-Name/IP Device 1D01D77PAW00124 18 6M2337YAJF1AE camers7 camers6 camers9 camers10 camers11 camers12 camers13 camers14 camers15 camers16 camers17 camers18 camers19 camers20 camers21 camers22 camers23 Record Image All Record Main Stream 2019 - 10 - 23 00 : 00 : 00 2019 - 10 - 23 23 : 59 : 59 Search Search range 30 days Drag or double-click the thumbnail to view in this window ALL 16:35:00 16:40:00 16:45:00 16:50:00 16:55:00 17:00:00 17:05:00 17:10:00 17:15:00 17:20:00 17:25:00 17:30

Step 2 Select a remote device, and then click Record tab.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Playing Back Recorded Video - 2

Click to display only channels. Click to display channels and devices.

Step 3 Select a record type from among All Record, Video Detect, and IO Alarm and Thermal.

• All record: Search for all records.
- Video detect: Search for the records of video detection. For setting of video detection record, see "6.4.3.1 Video Detect".
- IO alarm: Search for local alarm linkage records. For setting of local alarm linkage record, see "6.4.3.3 IPC External Alarm".
- Thermal: Search for videos of thermal alarms. For setting of thermal alarm linkage, see "6.4.3.4 Thermal Alarm".

Step 4 Select a stream type from main stream and sub stream.

Step 5 Set search time.

• Method 1: Click the date or time on the time column, change time or date value.
- Method 2: Click the date or time on the time column, use the mouse middle button to adjust time or date value.
• Method 3: Click 📋, set date or time on the schedule, click OK.

In the schedule page, if there is a dot under one date (such as ^24 ), the date has records.

Figure 5-21 Schedule page
Nov 2018 SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 00 00 00 OK

The record thumbnail is at the top of the remote device, and the time bar displays the record period (green color means there is a record).

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Step 6 Click Search. - 1

  • The selected remote device is on the left panel. Click a remote device, and the record file thumbnail is on the right panel.
  • Click or to move thumbnail list or hide/display the thumbnail.
  • Move the mouse pointer to the thumbnail, you can view remote device name, record start time, and end time of the corresponding record.
  • Move the mouse pointer to the thumbnail list. The interface displays ↗. Click the icon to hide the thumbnail list. If the thumbnail list is hidden, click ↘ to display the thumbnail list.

Figure 5-22 Search result
Local Device Device 208 Normal(1)TREM(3) 100%TTM46A5124 462%TTM47(246) common() Access FTP/Info Record Image All record Main Stream 2018 11 - 22 00 04 - 39 2018 11 - 22 21 - 34 - 34 Search Search range: 30 days 2018 11-22 00:00:00 2018 11-22 00:00:00 2018 11-22 00:00:00 2018 11-22 00:00:00 2018 11-22 00:00:00 2018 11-22 00:00:01 2018 11-22 00:00:01 2018 11-22 00:00:01 2018 11-22 00:00:01 2018 11-22 00:00:01 2018 11-22 00:00:02 2018 11-22 00:00:02 2018 11-22 00:00:03 2018 11-22 00:00:03 2018 11-22 00:00:04 2018 11-22 00:00:05 2018 11-22 00:00:06 2018 11-22 00:00:07 2018 11-22 00:00:08 2018 11-22 00:00:09 2018 11-22 00:00:10 2018 11-22 00:00:11 2018 11-22 00:00:12 2018 11-22 00:00:13 2018 11-22 00:00:14 2018 11-22 00:00:15 2018 11-22 00:00:16 2018 11-22 00:00:17 2018 11-22 00:00:18 2018 11-22 00:00:19 2018 11-22 00:00:20 Drag or double-click the double-mail to view in this window

Step 7 Drag the thumbnail to the playback window or double-click the thumbnail.

Device begins playing the record.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Step 6 Click Search. - 3

- The playback window amount depends on the thumbnail amount you can drag or select. System supports maximum 16 windows. System automatically adjusts each window size according to the original scale of playback file.

- The thumbnail with means system is playing record file of current thumbnail.

Figure 5-23 Search
Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Step 6 Click Search. - 4

Signal Words Description
Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Step 6 Click Search. - 5Click to synchronize playback mode. You can use the playback control icon to control several windows, such as fast forward/backward at the same time.Click [AAOX] to cancel synchronization operation.
Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Step 6 Click Search. - 6Set a time period. Click [TDSY] start playing the videos in the set time period.
Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Step 6 Click Search. - 7Play back several record files at the same time. Click the icon to switch to time synchronization mode. All other windows play the video file of the same time of current window.Click Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Step 6 Click Search. - 8 to cancel time synchronization.Click [XHBZ] system enables synchronization operation function. If you want to cancel synchronization, click .
[14YC]Click to play back video file at slow speed.The slow speed includes × 1/2, × 1/4, × 1/8 , and × 1/16 . Click the icon once, the playback speed degrades one level.
Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Step 6 Click Search. - 9Click to switch to frame by frame backward playback.It is only valid in pause mode.
Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Step 6 Click Search. - 10Click to play backward. Now the icon becomes . Click to stop backward play.
[235K]Click to start playback. Now the icon becomes . Click to pause playback video.
Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Step 6 Click Search. - 11Click to switch to frame by frame playback.It is only valid in pause mode.
Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Step 6 Click Search. - 12Click to play back at fast speed.The fast speed includes × 1, × 2, × 4, × 8 , and × 16 . Click the icon once, the playback speed upgrades one level.
Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Step 6 Click Search. - 13Displays playback speed. Drag ▼ to the left or right to playback at fast forward or fast backward.
Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Step 6 Click Search. - 14Click to capture an image.
Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Step 6 Click Search. - 15Click this icon to tag the current video.
Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Step 6 Click Search. - 16Click to obtain one part of record, and save it in designated storage path. See "5.2.2 Clipping Recorded Video" for detailed information.
[D3X0]Click ▼ to mute. The icon becomes × . Click × to unmute.
[637K]Click to play back at full screen.
Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Step 6 Click Search. - 17Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Step 6 Click Search. - 18Time bar. Displays record type and record file period.There are two record file bars on the time bar. The top bar is to display record time of selected window. The bottom bar is to display record time of all selected remote devices.The time bar adopts color to categorize record type. Green=Regular record. Red=Alarm record. Blank=No record.Time scale is to display record file date and time.System automatically adjusts time scale according to the record playback process.On the time bar, you can:◇ Click the time bar and rotate the mouse wheel button to adjust the time accuracy.Press the time bar and then drag to the left or right to move the time bar to view the hidden record time.Drag time scale to adjust start time of record playback.Click or drag the time scale to position where there is a record, system starts playing from the selected time.Click or drag the time scale to position where there is no record, system stops playing record.Shortcut menu: Right-click mouse on the playback window, you can view the shortcut menu.Zoom: It is to zoom in a specified zone and view the details. See "5.1.1.3.3 Digital Zoom" for detailed information.Original scale: Set view window scale.ON: Sys tem automatically adjusts video window scale according to the video resolution.OFF: System automatically adjusts video window scale according to the remote device amount and the free space on the playback panel.Audio: Set audio output.Fisheye: Set the installation method and display mode of fisheye camera. For details, see "5.1.1.3.4 Fisheye Dewarp".
Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Step 6 Click Search. - 19Move mouse pointer to the playback window, system pops up task column. Click the icon to close the playback window.

5.2.2 Clipping Recorded Video

Clip one part of the recorded video, and save it in designated storage path.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Clipping Recorded Video - 1

Connect USB device to the system if you are on the local menu to operate.

Step 1 Click + and then select SEARCH.

Step 2 Play video file. See "5.2.1 Playing Back Recorded Video".

Step 3 Click . [↓]

Video clipping frame appears on the time bar.

Figure 5-24 Video clipping frame
13-11-22 01:34:37 Save Immediately Cancel 01:20:00 01:25:00 01:30:00 01:45:00

Step 4 Click the record edit column (the blue column on Figure 5-24) and drag to the left or right, to select start time and end time of clipping.

Step 5 Click Save Immediately.

Figure 5-25 Save
Save (1) All Start Time End Time Record Length Size (1) camera1 2018-11-22 0... 2018-11-22 01:31:43 00:12:11 644.86MB Total 644.86MB Save Path: Browser... OK Cancel

Step 6 Click Browser to select saving path.

Step 7 Click OK.

Save the clipping to designated storage path.

5.2.3 Playing Back Snapshots

Search for and play back image according to remote device, image type, and snapshot time.

Step 1 Click + and then select SEARCH.

Step 2 Select a remote device, and then click Image.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Playing Back Snapshots - 1

System supports maximum 1 remote device.

Figure 5-26 Image playback (1)
LocalDevice Search Device Name:IF Device 1.0mm2 Access 8751 Media Record Video(Direct) VideoFilter 2021-04 14:00:39:30 2021-04 14:23:39:39 Search Search range: 36.0ms Deep or double click the thumbshell to view in this window. SINCHEN (SINCHEN)

Step 3 Select image type, including video detect, IO alarm and thermal, and then select detection type as needed.

Step 4 Set search time.

• Method 1: Click the date or time on the time column, change time or date value.
- Method 2: Click the date or time on the time column, use the mouse wheel to adjust time or date value.
Method 3: Click , set date or time on the schedule, click OK.

In the schedule page, if there is a dot under one date (such as ^24 ), the date has records.

Figure 5-27 Schedule page
Nov 2018 SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 00 00 00 OK

Step 5 Click Search.

Figure 5-28 Image thumbnail
IP PTZ Camera 2020-08-31 22:12:16 2020-08-31 22:12:16 2020-08-31 22:12:16

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Playing Back Snapshots - 5

  • The selected remote device is on the left panel. Click a remote device, and the image thumbnail is on the right panel.
  • Click or to move thumbnail list, and display the hidden thumbnail.
  • Move the mouse pointer to the thumbnail, you can view remote device name, and snapshot time of the corresponding thumbnail.
  • Move the mouse pointer to the thumbnail list. The interface displays 🔊. Click the icon to hide the thumbnail list. If the thumbnail list is hidden, click 🔼 to display the thumbnail list.

Step 6 Drag the thumbnail to the playback window or double-click the thumbnail.

Device begins playing the image.

Figure 5-29 Image playback (2)
Local Device Device 220 IPC Connect Access AT&T Media Record Image Video Detect VBA/TVB/VBA 2018 12 22 09 08 07 06 2018 12 22 09 08 07 06 Search Search image: 3D video 2018-11-22 09:24:46

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Playing Back Snapshots - 7

Move the mouse pointer to the playback window, you can see the following icons.

Table 5-10 Icons

Icon Description
Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Playing Back Snapshots - 8Click to switch to the previous image or the next image.
Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Playing Back Snapshots - 9Switch to the previous or next image or image group.When playing one image, click the icon to go to the previous image or the next image.When playing several images at the same time, click the icon to go to the previous group or the next group.
Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Playing Back Snapshots - 10Click to display at full screen. Click again to cancel full screen.

5.2.4 Exporting File

Export record file or image to the designated storage path.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Exporting File - 1

  • The default record file mode is .dav and the image file mode is .jpg.
  • Connect USB device to the system if you are on the local menu to operate.

Step 1

Click

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Exporting File - 2

and then select SEARCH.

Figure 5-30 Search (1)
Local Device Q 7 Device Avenue 4TSP Impact No search results Drag or double-click the thumbnail to view in this window Record Image All About Main Store 2018 - 11 - 12 00:00:00 2018 - 11 - 22 23 - 59 - 33 Search Image 20.jpg 16:00:00 16:30:00 16:50:00 17:00:00 17:30:00 18:00:00 18:30:00 18:50:00 19:00:00 19:30:00 20:00:00 20:30:00 21:00:00 21:30:00 21:50:00

Step 2 Search record file or image.

1) Click Record or Image tab.
2) Select a remote device and then set search criteria.
3) Click Query.

Step 3 Select the record file or image you want to export.

- Move the mouse pointer to the thumbnail and then click □ to select the thumbnail.

means checked.

- Click Cancel to cancel all record files or images.

Step 4 Select file storage path.

1) Click ↗ and then select Export record or Export image.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Exporting File - 4

The following steps are to export video file. See the actual page for detailed information.

2) Click OK.

Figure 5-31 Save
Save (1) All Start Time End Time Record Length Size (1) 228 IPC 2018-11-22 0... 2018-11-22 10:33:12 02:06:30 3.98GB Total 3.98GB Save Path: Browser... OK Cancel

3) Click Browser to select saving path.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Exporting File - 6

For local menu operation, after you set storage path, the Save page displays Format button. Click Format button to clear all data on the USB storage device. The formatting operation will clear all data. Be cautious.

4) Click OK.

Device goes back to Save page.

Step 5 Click OK.

The system starts to export files. The file downloading page is displayed.

Figure 5-32 Download
Download Resume All 11 Pause All Clear Complete Device Name Start Time End Time Process Operate 228 IPC 2018-11-22 08:26:42 2018-11-22 10:33:12 Downloading... 0% II 市

  • Click Pause all to pause all download tasks. Click Start all to resume download tasks.
  • Click Clear completed columns to delete all downloaded tasks.

  • Click " of the corresponding task to pause download task. Click ▶ to resume download.

  • Click of the corresponding task to delete download task.

5.2.5 Video Tag

Tag specific video segments or pictures for the ease of search. For details about viewing tagged files, see "7.1.1 Video Tag Management".

Step 1 Click + , and then select SEARCH.

Step 2 Search for pictures or videos.

1) Click the Record or Image tab.
2) Select a camera, and then set search conditions.
3) Click Search.

Step 3 Click at the lower-right corner of the playback window.

Figure 5-33 Tag
Local Device Search Device Name/SP Device 1061077TRANT08124 Access RTSP Media TotalPS Report Locks Unlock Cancel tag:0-2 tag:0-3 tag:0-4 2019-10-20 23:06:58 2019-10-21 00:00:07 2019-10-21 00:10:17 2019-10-21 00:21:27 2019-10-21 01:06:15 2019-10-21 02:07:21 2019-10-21 03:08:29 2019-10-21 04:09:30 2019-10-20 23:07:05 Tag Time: 2019-10-20 23:07:03 Tag Name: OK Cancel Record Image All Record Main Stream 2019 - 10 - 21 00 : 00 : 00 2019 - 10 - 21 23 : 59 : 59 Search Search range 30 days IPC

Step 4 Enter tag name, and then click OK.

5.2.6 Locking Files

Lock specific videos or pictures so they cannot be viewed. A locked file can only be viewed after being unlocked.

Step 1 Click + , and then select SEARCH.

Step 2 Search for pictures or videos.

1) Click the Record or Image tab.
2) Select a camera, and then set search conditions.
3) Click Search.

Step 3 Select the video files to be locked.

  • Point to the thumbnail, and then click □ to select the video.
    • You can click Cancel to cancel the selected videos.

Step 4 Click Lock.

Step 5 (Optional) Click Unlock to unlock the locked videos.

You can also unlock videos in FILE > FILE LOCKED. See "7.1.2 FILE LOCKED".

5.3 Alarm List

Click 9 to display alarm list. View alarm device name, alarm time and alarm type.

Figure 5-34 Alarm list
IPC 15:52:59 Motion IPC 15:52:32 Motion IPC 15:52:03 Motion

  • Number 9 is the number of alarm event to be processed. The value changes according to alarm amount. It displays maximum 200 unprocessed alarm events.
  • Click to lock alarm list. The alarm list is open and cannot hide. Click the icon again to cancel lock function. Move the mouse pointer to other position, and the alarm list displays for a period of time and then automatically hides.
  • Click √ to confirm alarm event. The confirmed event will be removed from the alarm list.
  • Click the alarm event on the alarm list. The device displays the 20 seconds video before and after the alarm event occurred.

Click 📊 to pause play. Now the icon becomes ▶. Click ▷ again to continue to play.

◇ Click OK and close, confirm the alarm event and then exit the page.

Figure 5-35 Alarm video
Device Name 228,IPC Alarm type Motion Alarm time 2018-11-22 16:13:18 Confirm and close

5.4 System Information

View system information including system error, system alarm and system notification.

Click to display background task list.

Figure 5-36 System information
All Error Warning Notification No Message Clear

  • Click All, Error, Warning, or Notification tab to view the corresponding system information list.
  • Click 📄 to clear the corresponding system information.
  • Click Clear to clear system information under current tab. For example, click All tab and then click Clear button to clear all system information. Click Error tab and then click Clear button to clear all system error information.

5.5 Background Task

View background task running status.

Click 📄, device displays background task list. Click All, Running, or Waiting to view the corresponding background task list.

Figure 5-37 Background task
All Running Waiting No Background Tasks

5.6 Buzzer

View buzzer alarm messages.

Click The alarm messages are displayed.

Figure 5-38 Buzzer
5 2 No Message Refresh

6 System Configuration

This chapter introduces system configuration functions such as managing remote device, setting network, setting alarm event, setting HDD storage, managing user information, setting device security strategy, and setting system parameters.

6.1 Configuration Page

Click 🤿. The following page is displayed.

Figure 6-1 Configuration page
APPLICATIONS DEVICE NETWORK STORAGE ACCOUNT EVENT SECURITY SYSTEM Network Storage

On this page, you can:

- Click the corresponding app icon to go to the corresponding page. The task column displays current running app name. Move the mouse pointer to the app name and then click ✗ to close the app.

- Click Exit to exit the page.

6.2 Device Management

Click 🎨 or click + on the configuration page, and then select DEVICE. The DEVICE page is displayed. You can set EVS or remote devices.

  • Select the root node in the resource tree to set EVS name and storage plan.
  • Select a remote device in the Device list. Set its property, connection, video, OSD, and storage plan.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Device Management - 1

Click + or click Add to add remote device to the system. See "3.4.2 Adding Remote Device" for detailed information.

Figure 6-2 Device management
Device Unit Device Info Camera Name Removing Bandwidth/Total:997.68 Mbps 2024 Mbps Remaining Channels/Total : 497/512 Add History P Export Such Import Change Channel No. State Channel Name Address Regist ID Port User Name Password Manufacturer Product Model In Remote Ch... Operant 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 PTC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC IPC205 0 admin - Register P-11-11-11-11-11-11-11-11-11-11-11-11-11-11-11-11-11-11-11-11-11-11-11-11-11-11-11-11-11-11-11-11-11-11- Total 13 items Show up to 50 1/1 60

6.2.1 Viewing Device Information

View information of the Device.

Step 1 Click , and then select DEVICE.

Step 2 Select the root node in the resource tree, and then click the Device Info tab.

Step 3 Set parameters.

Figure 6-3 Device info
Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Viewing Device Information - 1

bar | Device | Name | Description | | :--- | :--- | :--- | | DEVICE INFO | | | | Slot | Mainboard(Slot1) | Slot Standby Board(Slot2) | | Type | EVS | Type EVS | | SN | 7 AC | SN 7A ,C | | Single Board SN | 5 27 | Single Board SN 7A 94 | | MAC1 | b | MAC1 24 | | MAC2 | b | MAC2 24 | | MAC3 | b | MAC3 24 | | MAC4 | b | MAC4 24 | | MAC10 | b | MAC10 24 | | System Version | V 0.R.Build Date:2022-04-26 04:01:59 | System Version V4 0.R.Build Date:2022-04-26 04:01:59 | | Security Baseline Version | V2.2 | Security Baseline Version V2.2 | | WEB Version | V4.0.0.148881 | WEB Version V4.0.0.148881 | | ONVIF Client Version | V2.4.1 | ONVIF Client Version V2.4.1 | | ONVIF Server Version | 21.12(V3.1.0.1207744) | ONVIF Server Version 21.12(V3.1.0.1207744) | | Video In/Out | 400/512 | Video In/Out 400/512 | | Input bandwidth | 819.71Mbps/1024.00Mbps | Input bandwidth 819.71Mbps/1024.00Mbps |

Table 6-1 Device info parameters

Parameters Description
NameSet device name.
DescriptionEnter device description.
Device infoDisplays device info, including device SN, mainboard SN, MAC, video in/out, input bandwidth, system version, security baseline version, and web version.

Step 4 Click Save.

6.2.2 Remote Devices

Add remote devices, change IP addresses and configurations, and export remote device information.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Remote Devices - 1

See "3.4.2 Adding Remote Device" for detailed information.

6.2.2.1 Viewing Remote Devices

View connected remote devices. For details about adding devices, see "3.4 Configuring Remote Device".

Step 1 Click 📋, or click + on the configuration page, and then select DEVICE.

Step 2 Select the root node in the resource tree, and then click the Device List tab.

Figure 6-4 Device list
Device List Device Info Camera Name Removing Bandwidth/Total:997.61 Mbps 1024 Mbps Remaining Channels/Total : 497.512 Add USB https:// Export Batch Import Color Channel/No. State ChannelName Address Region ID Port View Name Password Manufacturer Product/Model In Remote Off... Operator 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC IPC

Step 3 View details of connected devices, including IP address and serial number.

• In the State column, ● indicates that the Device is offline.
• In the State column, ● indicates that the Device is online.
- In the State column, ⚠ indicates that the Device is exception. Point to ⚠, and then you are prompted about the details of the exception, such as being uninitialized, device mismatch, and wrong password.

Step 4 (Optional) Click 📋 to set searching conditions.

Step 5 (Optional) You can select the uninitialized devices to initialize them. For details, see "3.4.1 Initializing Remote Device".

6.2.2.2 Changing IP Address

Modify IP address of the remote device connected or not connected to the Device.

6.2.2.2.1 Modifying IP of Unconnected Devices

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Modifying IP of Unconnected Devices - 1

  • You can only modify the IP address of initialized devices. For remote device initialization, see "3.4.1 Initializing Remote Device" for detailed information.
  • You can only modify the IP address of remote devices connected with private protocol.

Step 1 Click 🎨, or click + on the configuration page, and then select DEVICE.

Step 2 Click + or click Add, and then select Smart Add.

Step 3 Click Start Search.

Figure 6-5 Remote device
Add Device Smart Add Manual Add RTSP Batch Import Stop Search Password Initialize Modify IP (0) Initialization Sta... Address Product Model Manufacturer Port Product Type Sn Operate ✓ Initialized Onvif 80 -- -- ✓ Initialized Onvif 80 -- -- ✓ Initialized Onvif 80 -- -- ✓ Initialized Private 37777 EVS 5K02166YAJ... LTR ✓ Initialized Private 37777 EVS 5K02166YAJ... LTR ✓ Initialized Private 37777 EVS 4M05A23YAJ... LTR ✓ Initialized Private 37777 EVS 4M05A23YAJ... LTR Total 7 Item(s) Show up to 50 1/1 GO Remaining Bandwidth/Total: 362.46 Mbps/ 1024 Mbps Add Cancel

Step 4 Select a remote device and then click Modify IP.

Figure 6-6 Modify IP
Modify IP address (1) Sn IP Address -- 10 Static IP Address . . . Incremental Value 1 Subnet Mask . . . Gateway . . . admin ************ support Private, Onvif only Next Cancel

Step 5 Enter the static IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and incremental value.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Modifying IP of Unconnected Devices - 4

  • Enter incremental value only when multiple remote devices are modified. If you want to change IP addresses of several devices at the same time, system allocates IP address one by one according to your setting at the fourth bit of the IP address.
  • If there is IP conflict when changing static IP address, device pops up IP conflict dialogue box. To change IP addresses in batches, system automatically skips the conflicted IP and begins the allocation according to the incremental value.

Step 6 Enter the username and password of remote device.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Modifying IP of Unconnected Devices - 5

When you are changing several device IP addresses, make sure that the username and password of these remote devices are the same.

Step 7 Click Next.

The modification result is displayed.

Step 8 Click OK to complete the modification.

6.2.2.2.2 Modifying IP of Connected Devices

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Modifying IP of Connected Devices - 1

  • You can only modify the IP address of initialized devices. For remote device initialization, see "3.4.1 Initializing Remote Device" for detailed information.
  • You can only modify the IP address of remote devices connected through private protocol.
  • To modify the IP address of connected devices one by one, see "6.2.2.3.2 Configuring Connection Information".

Step 1

Click

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Modifying IP of Connected Devices - 2

or click

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Modifying IP of Connected Devices - 3

on the configuration page, and then select DEVICE.

Figure 6-7 Device management
Device No. 1 Status 7 ChannelName 2 Address 3 Regist ID 4 Port 5 View Name 6 Password 7 Manufacturer 8 Product Model 9 In 10 Remote Off... 1 Operator 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Bosch-400: Total:PF7.62 Mbps/1024 MHz Remaining Channels:Total | 4PHS12 Bosch-400: Total:PF7.62 Mbps/1024 MHz Remaining Channels:Total | 4PHS12 Bosch-400: Total:PF7.62 Mbps/1024 MHz Remaining Channels:Total | 4PHS12 Bosch-400: Total:PF7.62 Mbps/1024 MHz Remaining Channels:Total | BOSCH-400: Total:PF7.62 Mbps/1024 MHz Remaining Channels:Total | BOSCH-400: Total:PF7.62 Mbps/1024 MHz Remaining Channels:Total | BOSCH-400: Total:PF7.62 Mbps/1024 MHz Remaining Channels:Total | BOSCH-400: Total:PF7.62 Mbps/1O24 MHz Remaining Channels:Total | BOSCH-400: Total:PF7.62 Mbps/1024 MHz Remaining Channels:Total | BOSCH-400: Total:PF7.62 Mbps/1024 MHz Remaining Channels:Total | BOSCH-400: Total:PF7.62 Mbps/1024 MHz Remaining Channels:Total | BOSCH-40

Step 2 Select a remote device and then click Modify IP.

Figure 6-8 Modify IP
Modify IP address (1) Sn IP Address IP address Static IP Address Incremental Value 1 Subnet Mask User Name Gateway Password support Private only Next Cancel

Step 3 Enter the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and incremental value.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Modifying IP of Connected Devices - 6

  • Enter incremental value only when multiple remote devices are modified. If you want to change IP addresses of several devices at the same time, system allocates IP address one by one according to your setting at the fourth bit of the IP address.
  • If there is IP conflict when changing static IP address, device pops up IP conflict dialogue box. To change IP addresses in batches, system automatically skips the conflicted IP and begins the allocation according to the incremental value.

Step 4 Enter the username and password of remote device.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Modifying IP of Connected Devices - 7

When you are changing several device IP addresses, make sure that the username and password of these remote devices are the same.

Step 5 Click Next.

The result of IP modification is displayed.

Step 6 Click OK.

6.2.2.3 Configuring Remote Devices

Set remote device property, connection information, and video parameters.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Configuring Remote Devices - 1

Different remote devices have different pages. See the actual page for detailed information.

6.2.2.3.1 Viewing Device Property

Set remote device name, and view device information.

Step 1 Click 🎨, or click + on the configuration page, and then select DEVICE.

Step 2 Select a remote device on the left panel and then click Property tab.

Step 3 Set parameters.

Table 6-2 Property parameters description

Parameters Description
NameSet remote device name. Enable Sync to remote device and save the settings to synchronize new name to the remote device.
DescriptionInput remote device description.
DEVICE INFODisplays remote device information. It includes remote device type, SN, MAC address, video in/out, audio in/out, alarm in/out, and system version.

Step 4 Click Save.

6.2.2.3.2 Configuring Connection Information

Set connection information of remote device, such as IP address and port number.

Step 1 Click 🎨, or click + on the configuration page, and then select DEVICE.

Step 2 Select a remote device on the left panel and then click the Connection tab. Step 3 Change IP address.

1) Click of the corresponding address.
2) Enter IP address, subnet mask and gateway.
3) Click Test to test whether the IP address is valid.

Figure 6-9 Modify IP
Modify IP IPv4 IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Test OK Cancel

4) Click OK to save setting.

Step 4 Change port number.

1) Click of the corresponding port.

The Modify Port page is displayed. See Figure 6-10.

Figure 6-10 Port
Modify Port Port 37777 OK Cancel

2) Change port number.
3) Click OK to save setting.

Step 5 Set other parameters.

Table 6-3 Connection parameters description

Parameters Description
ManufacturerDisplays the connection protocol of the remote device.
User NameEnter username and password of remote device.The password should consist of 8 to 32 non-blank characters and contain at least two types of characters among uppercase, lowercase, number, and special character (excluding '";: &). Enter a strong password according to the password strength indication.
Password
Link typeDisplays link type of the system and remote device. It is self-adaptive.

Step 6 Click Save.

Step 7 (Optional) Click , and then you can go to the web interface of the remote device.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Configuring Connection Information - 3

On the local interface of the Device, you cannot click e to go to the web interface of the remote device.

6.2.2.3.3 Configuring Video Parameters

Set different video parameters according to different bit stream types based on the bandwidth.

Step 1 Click 🎨, or click + on the configuration page, and then select DEVICE.

Step 2 Select a remote device on the left panel and then click Video tab.

Figure 6-11 Video
Main Stream Substream1 Substream2 Smart Codec SVC Normal Video Quality Encode Mode H 264 Resolution 4000*3000(4000x3000) FPS 25 Stream Mode CBR VBR Bitrate 12288 (Kb/s) Frame Interval 50 (25-150) Event Video Quality

Step 3 Set main stream, sub stream 1, or sub stream 2.

Step 4 Set general video quality parameters.

Table 6-4 Video parameters description

ParametersDescription
Smart CodecEnable this function to enhance performance of video compression and thus reduce storage space requirement.Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Configuring Video Parameters - 2This function is only available for main stream.
SVCSelect the checkbox to enable SVC function. Select 1 or 2 from the drop-down list on the right. The default setup is 1, there is no scaled encoding.SVC refers to the scaled video coding. It can split the video stream to basic stream and enhanced scale.
Encode modeSet video encode mode.H.264: It is a highly compressed video encoding or encoding standard. At the same video quality, it has increased the compression rate by 2X compared with the MPEG-2.H.265: It is a new video encode standard coming after H.264. It has improved the complicated relationship among bit stream, encode quality, latch and algorithm on the previous standard. It can get the best encoding.
ResolutionSet video resolution. The higher the resolution is, the better the video quality is.Different series products support different resolutions. See the actual page for detailed information.
FPSSet the frame amount displayed at each second. The higher the frame rate is, the more vivid and fluent the video is.
Stream modeSet video bit stream control mode.CBR: The bit stream changes slightly. The bit stream is near the value you set here.VBR: The bit stream might change according to the environment.
QualitySet video quality. It includes low, middle, high.
It is null when the stream mode is CBR.
BitrateSet video bitrate.● Main stream: In the Bit Rate list, select a value or enter a customized value to change the image quality. The larger the value is, the better the image will become.● Sub stream: In CBR mode, the bit stream changes around the value you set. In VBR mode, it changes according to the bit stream value, but its max value is near the specified value.
I frame intervalSet the P frame amount between two I frames. Usually we recommend it is the 2X of the frame rate.

This function is only available for main stream.

Step 5 Enable Event Video Quality and set FPS and stream mode.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Configuring Video Parameters - 3

Event video quality is for main stream only.

Step 6 Click Save.

6.2.2.3.4 Configuring OSD

Configure overlay time information, and channel information on the video.

Step 1 Click 🎨, or click + on the configuration page, and then select DEVICE.

Step 2 Select a remote device on the left panel and then click OSD tab.

Figure 6-12 OSD
Device Name Time Stack Geographical Position Privacy Masking 2021-06-23 09:46:5 No. Name Type Color Operate 0 Mosaic 1 Mosaic 2 Color Block 3 Color Black 4 Color Black 5 Color Black + Add Refresh Clear

Step 3 Enable OSD information according to actual requirements.

- Set device name

  1. Click □ to enable OSD of device name.

  2. Click .

  3. Enter device name.

Figure 6-13 Device name
Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Configuring OSD - 2

  1. Drag the text box to the proper position.
  2. Click ☐ to save the OSD information.

- Set time information

  1. Click to enable OSD of time.
  2. Click .

Figure 6-14 Time
Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Configuring OSD - 3

  1. Drag the text box to the proper position.
  2. Click ☐ to save the OSD information.

- Set geographical position

  1. Click □ to enable OSD of geographical position.
  2. Click .
  3. Enter the geographical position information.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Configuring OSD - 4

Click to adjust the alignment of text boxes.
◇ Click ☑ or ☑ to create a text box.
◇ Click to delete a text box.

Figure 6-15 Geographical position
aaaa bbb ccc ddd

  1. Drag the text box to the proper position.
  2. Click ☐ to save the OSD information.

- Set privacy masking

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Configuring OSD - 6

This function is available only when the camera supports privacy masking.

  1. Click □ to enable privacy masking.

  2. Click Add, select the masking type and color, and then draw mosaic or color blocks in the image as needed.

  3. Drag blocks to the proper position.

  4. Click to save the OSD information.

Step 4 Click Save.

6.2.2.3.5 Configuring Audio Parameters

Step 1 Click ⚙, or click + on the configuration page, and then select DEVICE.

Step 2 Select a remote device on the left panel and then click Audio tab.

Figure 6-16 Audio
Property Connection Video OSD Audio Audio Output Type Lineln Mic Noise Filter Main Stream Substream1 Substream2 Enable Compression G.711A Sampling Frequency 8000

Step 3 Select an audio output type.

• Lineln: The Device acquires audio signals through external audio device.
- Mic: The Device acquires audio signals through internal mic.

Step 4 Click to enable Noise Filter.

Step 5 Click the Main Stream, Substream1 or Substream2 tab, and then configure the parameters.

Table 6-5 Audio parameters

Parameter Description
CompressionThe audio encoding mode set here applies to both audio streams and voice talks. We recommend leaving it as default.
Sampling FrequencyThe number of samples of a sound that are taken per second. The higher the value, the more accurate the digital representation of the sound can be.

Step 6 Click Save.

6.2.2.4 Exporting Remote Devices in Batches

Export the added remote device. When the Device restores factory default settings or information of remote device is lost, export information of remote device to recover quickly.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Exporting Remote Devices in Batches - 1

See "3.4.2 Adding Remote Device" for detailed information.

Step 1 Click 🎨, or click + on the configuration page, and then select DEVICE.

Step 2 Click at the lower-left corner.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Exporting Remote Devices in Batches - 2

Click Download Template to download template file of the remote device, and add remote device through the template.

Figure 6-17 Export
Export Encryption Yes No Download Template OK Cancel

Step 3 Select encryption or not.

- If you select Yes, the system exports encrypted .backup file.

- If you select No, the system exports .csv file, which can be opened with Excel. The exported .csv file contains IP address, registration ID, port number, channel number, channel name, manufacturer, username (excluding password), link type, remote channel number, product model and SN of the remote device.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Exporting Remote Devices in Batches - 4

When unencrypted file is exported, keep the file properly to avoid data leakage.

Step 4 Click OK.

Step 5 Click Save.

File path might be different depending on page operations. See actual pages.

- On PCAPP, click ≡, select Download to view file saving path. For details, see "9.3 Viewing Downloads".

- Select file saving path during local operation.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Exporting Remote Devices in Batches - 5

Connect USB device to the system if you are on the local menu to operate.

- During web operations, files are saved under default downloading path of the browser.

6.2.2.5 Importing Remote Devices in Batches

Import devices in batches by using the template.

On the Device List page, click Batch Import to go to the Add Device page. On the Add Device page, click the Import CSV File tab. For further operation instruction about how to use the CSV file to import devices in batches, see "3.4.2.4 Batch Add".

Figure 6-18 Import in batches
Add Device Smart Add Manual Add RTSP Batch Import Choose File Browse Import Download Template (0) Manufacturer Address User Name Password Port Channel No Remote CH No... Operate Total 0 Item(s) Show up to 50 GO Remaining Bandwidth/Total: 375.16 Mbps/ 1024 Mbps Overwrite ADD Add Cancel

6.2.2.6 Connecting Remote Devices

On the Device page, view connection status of remote device in the Device list.

When the remote device name and icon is black, SDT5A403 for example, it means the remote device is online. When they are gray, C2 8249 for example, it means the remote device is offline.

  • Right-click the offline device, and then select Connect to connect the Device.
  • Right-click the online device, and then select Disconnect to disconnect the Device.
  • Right-click the online device, and then select Open WEB to go to the web interface of the Device.

Figure 6-19 Device list
SearchDevice Name/IP 456 Device 1D01D77PAW00124 5-18 6-camera6 Access RTSP Media

6.2.2.7 Deleting Remote Devices

On the Device page, delete the registered remote device.

- Delete one by one:

◇ Select a remote device and then click 📄 to delete.
On the Device List page, right-click a remote device and then click Delete.
On the Device List page, select a remote device, and then click
On the Device List page, select a remote device, and then click Delete.

- Batch delete:

Click ☐, device list displays checkbox for you to select multiple remote devices. Click to delete the selected devices.

On the Device List page, select multiple remote devices, and then click Delete.

6.2.2.8 Configuring Camera Name

You can view and change the name of the connected cameras.

Step 1 Log in to PCAPP.

Step 2 Click 🎨, or click + on the configuration page, and then select DEVICE.

Step 3 Select the root node in the resource tree and then click the Camera Name tab.

Figure 6-20 Camera name
Device List Device Info Camera Name Channel1: 27 Channel2: IPC Channel3: Channel5 Channel4: Channel6 Channel5: Channel7 Channel6: Channel8 Channel7: Channel9 Channel8: Channel10 Channel9: Channel11 Channel10: Channel12 Channel11: Channel13 Channel12: Channel14 Channel13: Channel15 Channel14: Channel16 Channel15: Channel17 Channel16: Channel18 Channel17: Channel19 Channel18: Channel20 Channel19: Channel21 Channel20: Channel22 Channel21: Channel23 Channel22: Channel24 Channel23: Channel25 Channel24: Channel26 Channel25: Channel27 Channel26: Channel28 Channel27: Channel29 Channel28: Channel30 Channel29: Channel31 Channel30: Channel32 Channel31: Channel33 Channel32: Channel34 Channel33: Channel35 312 in total Jump to

Step 4 Select a channel, enter a new name, and then click Save.

6.3 Network Management

Click 🎨 or click + on the configuration page, select NETWORK. The NETWORK page is displayed. You can set basic network parameters and application.

Figure 6-21 Network management
Enable It is recommended that virtual IP address and default NIC IP address should be in the same network segment. IP Address Subnet Mask 255 . 255 . 255 . 0 Default Gateway Slot Slot1 Mainboard Slot1 Port Aggregation NIC NIC Type Dhcp IP Address Subnet Mask Mac Speed Operate Ethernet Netw... Electric Port No 255.255.255.0 b 10M/100M/1000M... Ethernet Netw... Electric Port No 255.255.255.0 b 10M/100M/1000M... Ethernet Netw... Electric Port No 255.255.255.0 b 10M/100M/1000M... Ethernet Netw... Electric Port No 255.255.255.0 b 10M/100M/1000M... Manage NIC Electric Port No 255.255.255.0 b 10M/100M/1000M... DNS Server Default NIC IP Type IPv4 Default Ethernet Ethernet Network1 Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server address Preferred DNS Alternate DNS

6.3.1 Basic Network

Set basic network parameters of the Device, such as IP address, port aggregation and port number, to connect with other devices in the network.

6.3.1.1 Configuring IP Address

Set device IP address, DNS server information and other information according to network planning.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Configuring IP Address - 1

Make sure that at least one Ethernet port has connected to the network before you set IP address.

Step 1 Click 🎨 or click + on the configuration page, and then select NETWORK > Basic Network > TCP/IP.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Configuring IP Address - 2

Click ↻ to view the NIC parameter information.

Figure 6-22 TCP/IP
Enable It is recommended that virtual IP address and default NIC IP address should be in the same network segment. IP Address: Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default: Gateway Slot Slot1 Mainboard Slot1 Port Aggregation NIC NIC Type Dhcp IP Address Subnet Mask Mac Speed Operate Ethernet Netw... Electric Port No 255.255.255.0 b 10M/100M/1000M... Ethernet Netw... Electric Port No 255.255.255.0 b 10M/100M/1000M... Ethernet Netw... Electric Port No 255.255.255.0 b 10M/100M/1000M... Manage NIC Electric Port No 255.255.255.0 b 10M/100M/1000M... DNS Server Default NIC IP Type IPV4 Default Ethernet Ethernet Network1 Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server address Preferred DNS Alternate DNS

Step 2 Click ☐ to enable the virtual IP address, and then set the virtual IP address, subnet mask and default gateway.

The main board and standby board have their respective physical IP. After setting the virtual IP, despite the switch between the main and standby boards, you can always log in to the web interface with the virtual IP.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Configuring IP Address - 4

The default virtual IP address is 192.168.0.108. We recommend you set the virtual IP address and the IP address of the default NIC on the same network segment.

Step 3 Select a slot from Slot1 and Slot2.

Step 4 Click of the corresponding NIC.

Figure 6-23 Edit Ethernet network
Edit Ethernet Network1 Speed 1000 Mb/s IP Type IPV4 Use Dynamic IP Address Use Static IP Address Static IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway MTU 1500 (1500-7200) OK Cancel

Step 5 Set parameters.

Table 6-6 TCP/IP parameters description

Parameters Description
SpeedCurrent NIC max network transmission speed.
IP TypeSelect IPv4 or IPv6.
Use Dynamic IP AddressWhen there is a DHCP server on the network, check the box to use dynamic IP address, system can allocate an dynamic IP address to the Device. There is no need to set IP address manually.
Use Static IP AddressCheck the box to use static IP address. Set static IP address, subnet mask and gateway. Set a static IP address for the Device.
MTUSet NIC MTU value. The default setup is 1500 Byte.We recommend you check the MTU value of the gateway first and then set the Device MTU value equal to or smaller than the gateway value. Reduce the packets slightly and enhance network transmission efficiency.[BXHW]Changing MTU value might result in NIC reboot, network offline and affect current running operation. Please be careful!

Step 6 Click OK.

Go back to TCP/IP page.

Step 7 Set DNS server information.

You can select to get DNS server manually or input DNS server information.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Step 7 Set DNS server information. - 1

This step is compulsive if you want to use domain service.

- Check the box to auto get DNS server address, device can automatically get the DNS server IP address on the network.

- Check the box to use the following DNS server addresses, and then enter primary DNS and alternate DNS IP address.

Step 8 Set default NIC.

Select default NIC from the drop-down list.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Step 7 Set DNS server information. - 2

Make sure that the default NIC is online.

Step 9 Click Save.

6.3.1.2 Port Aggregation

Bind multiple NIC to create one logic NIC and use one IP address for peripheral device. The bonded NIC can work as the specified aggregation mode to work. It enhances network bandwidth and network reliability.

System supports configuring load balance, fault tolerance, and link aggregation. See Table 6-7.

Table 6-7 Aggregation mode description

Aggregation modeDescription
Load balanceDevice has bonded several NICs at the same time and use one IP address to communicate with the external device. The bonded NICs are working together to bear the network load.The load balance mode adds the network throughput data amount and enhances network flexibility and availability. In this mode, the network is offline once all NICs break down.
Fault-toleranceIn this mode, device has bonded several NICs and set one NIC as the main card and the rest NICs are the alternative NICs. Usually, only the main NIC card is working. System can automatically enable other alternate cards to work when the main card breaks down.Fault-tolerance is a network mode to enhance NIC reliability. In this mode, the network is offline once all NICs break down.
Link aggregationDevice has bonded several NICs and all NICs are working together to share the network load. System allocates data to each NIC according to your allocated strategy. Once the system detects that one NIC breaks down, it stops sending data with this NIC, and then system transmits the data among the rest NICs. System calculates transmission data again after malfunctioning NIC resumes work.In this mode, the network is offline once all bonded NICs are malfunctioning.Make sure that the switch supports link aggregation and you have set the link aggregation mode.

6.3.1.2.2 Binding NIC

System supports load balance, fault-tolerance, and link aggregation. Select bind mode according to your actual requirements.

Step 1 Click 🎨 or click + on the configuration page, and then select NETWORK > Basic Network > TCP/IP.

Step 2 Bind NICs.

1) Click Port Aggregation.

Figure 6-24 Port aggregation

Port Aggregation
NICNIC TypeDhcpIP AddressSubnet MaskMacSpeed
Ethernet Network1Electric PortNo10M/100M/1000MSelf-...
Ethernet Network2Electric PortNo10M/100M/1000MSelf-...
Ethernet Network3Electric PortNo10M/100M/1000MSelf-...
Ethernet Network4Electric PortNo10M/100M/1000MSelf-...
Manage NICElectric PortNo10M/100M/1000MSelf-...

2) Select the NICs you want to bind.
3) Select an aggregation mode.
4) Click Port Aggregation.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Binding NIC - 1

The setting page varies depending on the aggregation mode you have selected. Figure 6-25 is the load balance setting page.

Figure 6-25 Edit load balance
Edit Load-Balance(Ethernet Network1+2) Speed 2000 Mb/s IP Type IPV4 Use Dynamic IP Address Use Static IP Address Static IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway MTU 1500 (1500-7200) NIC Mac Speed Ethernet Network1 Ethernet Network2 10M/100M/1000MSelf-Adaptive 10M/100M/1000MSelf-Adaptive OK Cancel

5) Set parameters.

Table 6-8 TCP/IP parameters description

Parameters Description
SpeedMaximum network transmission speed of current NIC.
IP TypeSelect IPv4 or IPv6.
Use Dynamic IP AddressWhen there is a DHCP server on the network, check the box to use dynamic IP address. System can allocate a dynamic IP address to the Device. There is no need to set IP address manually.
Use Static IP AddressCheck the box to use static IP address. Set static IP address, subnet mask and gateway. Set a static IP address for the Device.
MTUSet NIC MTU value. The value is 1500 bytes by default.We recommend you check the MTU value of the gateway first and then set the Device MTU value equal to or smaller than the gateway value. Reduce the packets slightly and enhance network transmission efficiency.Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Binding NIC - 3Changing MTU value might result in NIC reboot, network offline and affect current running operation. Please be careful!

6) Click OK.

Step 3 Click Save.

Step 4 Click OK to save the configuration.

The binding card information becomes activated after reboot operation.

6.3.1.2.3 Cancelling Binding NIC

Cancel port aggregation and allow the bonded NICs to work as independent card.

Step 1 Click 🎨 or click + on the configuration page, and then select NETWORK > Basic Network > TCP/IP.

Step 2 Select a bound NIC.

Figure 6-26 Confirm
Basic Network TCP/IP Port Network Appt Port Apprepation Safe Port Apprepation NIC NIC Type Chip IP Address Socket Mask Mac Speed Operate ● Load-Balance... Electric Port: No 172.12.1.101 255.255.0.0 3x6f8c 33x8f8.5c 10M/100M/1000... ● Load-Balance... Check Port: No 192.168.2.106 255.255.255.0 3x6f8c 33x8f8.5c 10M/100M-1000... Split or not OK Cancel DNS Server IP Type: IPv4 ○ Obtain DNS server address automatically ● Use the following DNS server address Preferred DNS: 8 8 8 8 Alternate DNS: 8 8 4 4 Default NIC Default Ethernet:Load-Balance(Internet Network I×2) Save Cancel

Step 3 Click OK.

System splits the bonded NIC.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Step 3 Click OK. - 1

After splitting NIC binding, the first NIC reserves the IP address configured during binding, while the rest NICs restore default IP addresses.

6.3.1.3 Setting Port Number

Step 1 Click 🎨, or click + on the configuration page, and then select NETWORK > Basic Network > Port.

Figure 6-27 Port
Max Connection 20 TCP 37777 RTSP 154 HTTP 80 HTTPS 442 GDP 37776 RTSP Format http://User.Human-Plaswidth-Group ID address - https://www.biosimmon/charson-16aType-0 channel: 1.128; subtype: Main Stream-0; Sub Stream 1. Save Cancel

Step 2 Set parameters.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Setting Port Number - 2

Log in again after modifying parameters except Max Connection.

Table 6-9 Connection setting parameters description

Parameters Description
Max ConnectionThe allowable maximum clients accessing the Device at the same time, such as web, PCAPP, and Platform. Select a value between 1 and 128. The default value setting is 20.
TCP PortSet according to the actual requirements. The default value is 37777. The value ranges from 1025 to 65535.
RTSP PortSet according to the actual requirements. The default value is 554. The value ranges from 1 to 65535.
HTTP PortSet according to the actual requirements. The default value is 80. The value ranges from 1 to 65535.If the value you set is not 80, please add the port number after the IP address when you are using browser to login the Device.
HTTPS PortSet according to the actual requirements. The default value is 443. The value ranges from 1 to 65535.
UDP PortSet according to the actual requirements. The default value is 37778. The value ranges from 1025 to 65535.

Step 3 Click Save.

System reboots corresponding service of the port.

6.3.2 Network Apps

Set device network parameters, so that system can connect to other devices.

6.3.2.1 P2P

P2P is a peer to peer technology. You can scan the QR code to download cellphone APP without DDNS service or the port mapping or installing the transmission server. After register the Device to the APP, you can view the remote video, playback record file and so on.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - P2P - 1

• Make sure that the system has connected to the network. Otherwise, the P2P function is null.
- When using the P2P function, we will collect device information such as IP address, MAC address, name and serial number. The collected information is only used for remote access.

Step 1 Click 🔍, or click + on the configuration page, and then select NETWORK > Network Apps>P2P.

The P2P page is displayed. Scan the QR code on the actual page.

Figure 6-28 P2P
P2P Access To assist you in remotely managing your device, the P2P will be enabled. After enabling P2P and connecting to Internet, we need to collect IP address, MAC address, device name, device SN, etc. All collected Info is used only for the purpose of remote access. If you don't agree to enable P2P function, please run off the switch. State Not Enable Scan the QR codes on your current P2P interface Mobile App Device QR Code SN: 012345 1.Download App 2.Add Device 3.Watch monitoring with App Save Cancel

Step 2 Click to enable P2P function.

Step 3 Click Save.

After the configuration, you can register a device to the APP to view remote video, playback record file, and so on. See corresponding cellphone APP for detailed information.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - P2P - 3

After successfully connected to the P2P, the status displayed as Success.

6.3.2.2 DDNS

After setting DDNS parameters, when IP address of EVS changes frequently, the system dynamically updates the relation between domain name and IP address on DNS server. You can use domain name to remotely access EVS, without need to note down IP address.

Preparation

Confirm whether EVS supports the DDNS Type and log in the website provided by the DDNS service provider to register the information such as domain from PC located in the WAN.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Preparation - 1

After you have registered and logged in the DDNS website successfully, you can view the information of all the connected devices under this username.

Procedure

Step 1 Click 🎨, or click + on the configuration page, and then select NETWORK > Basic Network > DDNS.

Figure 6-29 DDNS
Enable After enabling DDNS function, third party server may collect your device info. DDNS Type CN99 DDNS Server Address members.3322.org Domain User Name Username Password ****** Update Circle 30Min Current WAN IP Not Enable Status Not Enable

Step 2 Click to enable DDNS function.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Procedure - 2

After enabling DDNS function, the third-party server might collect your device information. Pay attention to privacy security.

Step 3 Set the corresponding parameters.

Table 6-10 DDNS setting parameters description

Parameters Description
DDNS TypeName and address of DDNS service provider.● Dyndns DDNS: members.dyndns.org● NO-IP DDNS: dynupdate.no-ip.com● CN99 DDNS: members.3322.org
Server Address
DomainThe domain name for registering on the website of DDNS service provider.
UsernameEnter the username and password obtained from DDNS service provider. You need to register (including username and password) on the website of DDNS service provider.
Password
Update CircleEnter the amount of time that you want to update the DDNS.
Current WAN IPDisplays the WAN IP address of EVS.
StatusDisplays DDNS registration result or update status.

Step 4 Click Save.

After successful configuration, enter domain name in address bar of the browser or PCAPP, and press Enter key to access the EVS.

6.3.2.3 Email

Configure email information, and enable alarm linkage email. When NVR has alarm events, the system automatically sends emails to the user.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Email - 1

Device data will be sent to specific servers after the email function is enabled. Be cautious.

Step 1 Click 🎨, or click + on the configuration page, and then select NETWORK > Network Apps > Email.

Figure 6-30 Configuring email
SMTP Server Enable Email Server Customize Server Address MailServer Encryption NONE Port 25 (1-65535) Attachment User Name anonymity Password ********** TEST Test Mail Send Receivers Add (C) Email Operate Save Cancel

Step 2 Click □ to enable the email function.

Step 3 Set parameters.

Table 6-11 EMAIL parameter description

Parameters Description
Email ServerSelect email server type, including Customize, Gmail, Hotmail, and Yahoo.
Server AddressEnter email server address.
EncryptionSelect encryption type of email server, including NONE, SSL, and TLS.You are recommended to select TLS. The other encryption methods might not be safe.
PortEnter the port number of email server.
User name and passwordEnter the configured username and password of email server.

Step 4 Add the information of email receiver.

1) Click Add.
2) Enter a receiver email address.

Figure 6-31 Email address
w Receivers + Add Email 1340018@msd.com Operate B +

3) Click Add or + to add other receiver email address.

  • Click ☐ to delete the added receiver.
  • Select a receiver. The Delete button is displayed. Click Delete button to delete the selected receiver.

Step 5 Click Save.

Step 6 (Optional) Test the email sending function.

1) In Test Mail, select or enter a receiver email address.
2) Click Send.

- When the configuration is correct, the system pops up a message of success, and the receiver will receive the test mail.

- Otherwise, the system pops up a message of failure, and the receiver will not receive the test mail.

6.3.2.4 SNMP

After setting SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) and successfully connecting devices through relevant software tools such as MIB Builder, and MG-SOFT MIB Browser, you can directly manage and monitor devices on software tools.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - SNMP - 1

  • Install SNMP device monitoring and management tools, such as MIB Builder and MG-SOFT MIB Browser.
  • Obtain the MIB file corresponding to the current version from technical support.

Step 1 Click 🎨, or click + on the configuration page, and then select NETWORK >Network Apps > SNMP.

Figure 6-32 SNMP (1)
SNMP Enable SNMP Version SNMP V1/V2 Port 161 Read Community Write Community Trap Server . . . . Trap Port 162 |1-65535>

Step 2 Click to enable the function.

Step 3 Select SNMP version.

• If you have selected SNMP V1/V2, see Figure 6-32.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Step 3 Select SNMP version. - 1

SNMP V1/V2 has security risks. You are recommended to use SNMP V3.

• If you have selected SNMP V3, see Figure 6-33.

Figure 6-33 SNMP (2)
SNMP Enable SNMP Version 5NMP V3 (Recommended) Port 161 Read Community Write Community Trap Server Trap Port 162 (1-65535) Read Only User public Read Authentication Type MD5 Read Authentication Password Read Encryption Type CBC-DES Read Encryption Password ********** Read/Write User private R/W Authentication Type MD5 R/W Authentication Password ********** R/W Encryption Type CBC-DES R/W Encryption Password ********** Save Cancel

Step 4 Set parameters. For Trap server address, enter the IP address of the PC that has MG-SOFT MIB Browser. Keep the other parameters as default.

Table 6-12 SNMP parameters

Parameters Description
PortListening port of agent programs on the Device.
Read CommunityRead or Write Community supported by the agent programs.
Write CommunityThe name can only contain numbers, letters, underscores, and middle lines.
Trap ServerThe destination address of Trap information sent by the agent program.
Trap PortThe destination port of Trap information sent by the agent program.
Read Only UserSet the username the read-only user. The read-only user can only have the read-only permission.
The name can only contain numbers, letters, and underscores.
Read Authentication TypeYou can select MD5 or SHA. It is MD5 by default.
Read Authentication PasswordThe password must contain at least 8 digits.
Read Encryption TypeCFB-AES by default.
Read Encryption PasswordThe password must contain at least 8 digits.
Read/Write UserThe username is private by default. If you log in using this username, you have the read-and-write permission.The name can only contain numbers, letters, and underscores.
R/W Authentication TypeYou can select MD5 or SHA. It is MD5 by default.
R/W Authentication PasswordThe password must contain at least 8 digits.
R/W Encryption TypeCFB-AES by default.
R/W Encryption PasswordThe password must contain at least 8 digits.

Step 5 Click Save.

6.3.2.5 Register

Register the Device on designated proxy server, and client software visits the Device through the proxy server.

Step 1 Click 🎨, or click + on the configuration page, and then select NETWORK > Network Apps > REGISTER.

Figure 6-34 Register
Endline IP Type: IPy4 Server: 0 0 0 0 Port: None Device ID: 0 Save Cancel

Step 2 Click to enable the function.

Step 3 Set parameters.

Table 6-13 Register

ParametersDescription
IP TypeSelect IP address of server for registration.
ServerIn the Server box, enter the IP address of server for registration.
PortEnter the port number of the server for registration.
Device IDEnter Device ID to identify EVS uniquely. Device ID shall be consistent with server configuration.

Step 4 Click Save.

6.3.2.6 UPnP

Through the UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) protocol, you can establish a mapping relationship between the LAN and the WAN, the WAN user can use the WAN IP address to directly access the Device in the LAN.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - UPnP - 1

Device services and ports will be mapped to the public network after UPnP is enabled. Be cautious.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - UPnP - 2

• Make sure that your PC has UPnP network services installed.
- Log in to the router and set the WAN port IP address of router.
- Enables the UPnP function on the router.
- Connect the Device to the router LAN (Local Area Network, LAN) port.
- Select NETWORK >Basic Network >TCP/IP, and then set the IP address to be the private-network IP of the router, or select DHCP to automatically obtain the IP address.

Step 1

Click

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - UPnP - 3

or click

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - UPnP - 4

on the configuration page, and then select NETWORK > Network

Apps > UPnP.

Figure 6-35 UPnP
Port Mapping State Search... LAN IP 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 WAN IP 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 Port Mapping List Service Name Protocol Internal Port External Port Operate HTTP TCP 80 8080 TCP TCP 37777 37777 UDP UDP 37778 37778 RTSP TCP 554 554 RTSP UDP 554 554 SNMP UDP 161 161 HTTPS TCP 443 443

Step 2 Set parameters.
Table 6-14 UPnP parameters

Parameters Description
Port MappingClick to enable UPnP.
State The status of port mapping.
LAN IPThe LAN IP address of router.The IP address is automatically obtained after the mapping succeeds.
WAN IPThe WAN IP address of router.The IP address is automatically obtained after the mapping succeeds.
Port Mapping ListThe list is consistent with the UPnP port mapping list on the router.Internal Port: The EVS port to be mapped on the router.External Port: The WAN port of the internal port.When setting the external port, use the ports between 1024 and 5000, and do not use the well-known ports 1 to 255 and the system ports 256 to 1023, so as to avoid conflicts.When there are multiple devices within the LAN, properly plan the port mapping to avoid conflicts of WAN ports.When making a port mapping, make sure that the port you are mapping is not occupied or restricted.The TCP/UDP WAN and LAN ports must be consistent and cannot be modified.
ModificationClick , and then you can modify the external port.

Step 3 Click Save.

Enter http://WAN IP: WAN port number in the browser to access the Device with the corresponding port number in the router network.

6.3.2.7 Multicast

When multiple users are viewing live video of the same device at the same time, it might cause failure due to limited bandwidth. To solve this problem, you can set a multicast IP address (224.0.0.0-239.255.255.255) for the Device.

Step 1 Click 🎨, or click + on the configuration page, and then select NETWORK > Network Apps > Multicast.

Figure 6-36 Multicast
Enable IP Address (224.0.0.0-239.255.255.255) Port 36666 (1025-65000)

Step 2 Click to enable multicast.

Step 3 Set parameters.

Table 6-15 Parameters

ParametersDescription
IP AddressSet the multicast IP address of the Device (224.0.1.0–239.255.255.255).
PortSet the multicast port (1025–65000).

Step 4 Click Save.

After configuring the multicast address and port, you can log in to the web interface or PCAPP client through the multicast protocol.

Take PCAPP for example. On the login interface of PCAPP, select Multicast as the login type. The PCAPP client will automatically obtain the multicast address and join the multicast group. After login, you can view live videos through multicast protocol.

Figure 6-37 Log in through multicast
EMS Login for EVS admin Password TCP TCP UDP Multicast Login

6.3.2.8 Alarm Center

You can configure the alarm center server to receive the uploaded alarm information.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Alarm Center - 1

Make sure that alarm center server is deployed.

Step 1 Click 🎨, or click + on the configuration page, and then select NETWORK > Network Apps > Alarm Center.

Figure 6-38 Alarm center
Enable IP Type IPv4 Server Address Server Address Port 1 (1-65535) Auto Report Plan Everyday 08:00

Step 2 Click □ to enable alarm center.

Step 3 Configure the parameters.

Table 6-16 Alarm center parameters

Parameter Description
IP TypeSelect the IP type of the alarm center server.
Server AddressThe IP address and communication port of the alarm center server.
Port
Auto Report PlanSelect time cycle and specific time for uploading alarm.

Step 4 Click Save.

6.3.2.9 Route Table

Configure the route table so that the system can automatically calculate the best path for data transmission.

Step 1 Click 🎨, or click + on the configuration page, and then select NETWORK > Network Apps > Route Table.

Step 2 Click Add.

Figure 6-39 Add route table
Add NIC Ethernet Network1 No. 1 IP Section 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 Subnet Mask 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 Gateway 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 OK Cancel

Step 3 Enter the information.
Step 4 Click OK.

6.4 Event Management

Click 🎨 or click + on the configuration page, select EVENT.

On the page, configure alarm event, including alarm event of EVS and remote device.

  • Select the root node in the resource tree on the left to set alarm event of the Device. See "6.4.2 Local Device" for detailed information.
  • Select remote device in the device tree on the left, to set alarm event of this remote device. See "6.4.3 Remote Device" for detailed information.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Event Management - 1

- The alarm event might be different depending on the model you purchased.

• √ means that the corresponding alarm event has been enabled.

• means that AI by Camera has been enabled.

Figure 6-40 Event management

Overview Overview CharmingFilter
DEVICE INFOFactVideo MetadataInsVehicleCrowd Do... - Call Detect... - Smoking Do... - People Go... -
Channel No.StateChannel NameAddress/Regist ID
12710:37:16:11:35
2Channel210:37:16:2-51
3PC10:37:19:189
Abnormal Event Device Offline

6.4.1 Alarm Actions

System can trigger the corresponding actions when an alarm occurs.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Alarm Actions - 1

The supported actions might be different depending on the model you purchased.

On the alarm configuration page, click Actions to display actions. See Table 6-17 for detailed information. Configure actions according to your actual need.

• After setting actions, click Save on the page.

• After enabling actions, click ✗ to disable the corresponding actions.

Table 6-17 Actions description

Actions DescriptionPreparation
RecordThe system links the selected remote device to record when there is a corresponding alarm event.Remote device, such as IPC, has been added. See "3.4.2 Adding Remote Device" for detailed information.
BuzzerThe system activates a buzzer alarm when there is a corresponding alarm event.
LogThe system notes down the alarm information in the log when there is a corresponding alarm event.
EmailThe system sends alarm email to all added receivers when there is corresponding an alarm event.Email configuration has been completed. See "6.3.2.3 Email" for detailed information.
SnapshotThe system takes snapshots of the linked channel when there is corresponding alarm event.
PresetThe system links the selected remote device to rotate to the designated preset point when there is a corresponding alarm event.PTZ device has been added, and preset point has been added.See "3.4.2 Adding Remote Device" for detailed information.
Remote Device Alarm Output SettingsWhen there is an alarm, system can trigger the corresponding device to generate alarm.IPC has been added, and IPC is connected with alarm output device. See "3.4.2 Adding Remote Device" for detailed information.
AccessWhen there is an alarm, system can trigger the corresponding access control device to open door and close door.See "3.4.2 Adding Remote Device" for detailed information.
Smart TrackingAlarm is triggered when a tripwire or intrusion behavior is detected. If smart tracking action is configured, the PTZ camera automatically rotates to the target view to track it.See "6.4.1.10 Smart Tracking".
Report AlarmWhen an alarm occurs, the system reports the alarm to alarm center.Alarm center has been enabled.For details, see "6.3.2.8 Alarm Center".
Actions Description Preparation
Audio and Light AlarmWhen an alarm occurs, the system associates with the remote device to perform audio and light actions.The camera that supports this function has been connected. For details, see "6.4.1.12 Audio and Light Alarm".

6.4.1.1 Record

Enable record control function. The system links the selected remote device to record when there is corresponding alarm event.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Record - 1

Make sure that the remote device, such as IPC, has been added. See "3.4.2 Adding Remote Device" for detailed information.

Step 1 Click Actions, and then select Record.

Figure 6-41 Record
Record | camera7 Device camera7 Post-Record 10 Second (10-300)

Step 2 Set the time length of recording after the event moment.

Step 3 (Optional) Repeat Step 1–Step 2 to link multiple remote devices to record.

6.4.1.2 Buzzer

The system activates a buzzer alarm when there is corresponding alarm event.

Click Actions and select Buzzer to enable this function.

Figure 6-42 Buzzer
Buzzer | Enable + Actions

6.4.1.3 Log

Enable the log function. The system notes down the alarm information in the log when there is corresponding alarm event.

Click Actions and select Log to enable this function.

Figure 6-43 Log
Log | Enable + Actions

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Log - 2

When log function is enabled, after an alarm is triggered, click + on LIVE page, select

MAINTAIN > Log > Event.

6.4.1.4 Email

Enable email function. The system sends alarm email to all added receivers when there is corresponding alarm event.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Email - 1

Make sure that the Email configuration has been completed. See "6.3.2.3 Email" for detailed information.

Click Actions and select Email to enable this function.

Figure 6-44 Email
Email | Enable + Actions

6.4.1.5 Preset

Set preset function. The system links the selected remote device to rotate to the designated preset point when there is corresponding alarm event.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Preset - 1

Make sure that the PTZ device has been added, and preset has been added. See "3.4.2 Adding Remote Device" for detailed information.

Step 1 Click Actions and select Preset.

Figure 6-45 Preset
Preset | IP PTZ Camera | 1 Device: IP PTZ Camera Preset: 1 Actions

Step 2 Select PTZ device, and enter preset number.

Step 3 (Optional) Repeat Step 1–Step 2, and link multiple PTZ devices to turn to designated presets.

6.4.1.6 Snapshot

Set the snapshot linkage action for alarms, so that once an alarm happens, it will trigger a snapshot of the alarm.

Click Actions, and then select Snapshot.

Figure 6-46 Snapshot action
Snapshot | camera7 Device camera7

6.4.1.7 Remote Device Alarm Out

Set remote device alarm output. System can trigger the corresponding alarm output device when an alarm occurs.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Remote Device Alarm Out - 1

Make sure that the remote device has been added, and the remote device is connected with alarm output device. See "3.4.2 Adding Remote Device" for detailed information.

Step 1 Click Actions and select IPC Alarm Out.

Figure 6-47 Remote device alarm output settings
Remote Device Alarm Output | Output Port1 Device 4 Output Port Output Port1

Step 2 Select a remote device and alarm output port.

You can select multiple alarm output ports.

Step 3 (Optional) Repeat Step 1–Step 2, and link multiple remote alarm output devices.

6.4.1.8 Access

Set access control function. When there is an alarm, system can trigger the corresponding access control device to open door and close door.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Access - 1

Make sure that access control device has been added. See "3.4.2 Adding Remote Device" for detailed information.

Step 1 Click Actions and select Access.

Figure 6-48 Access
Access Device Action

Step 2 Select access control device.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Access - 3

Not all models support this function.

Step 3 (Optional) Repeat Step 1–Step 2, and link multiple access control devices.

6.4.1.9 Voice Prompt

Set voice prompt function. When there is an alarm, system can play the selected audio file.

Step 1 Click Actions and select Voice Prompt.

Figure 6-49 Voice prompt
Voice Prompt File Name: Delay Time: PlayTimes 1 + Actions

Step 2 In the File Name list, select the audio file that you want to play for this configured period.

Step 3 Set delay time.

  • Play times: Select Play Times and enter the times to play the file. After the alarm event is ended, system will continue to play the voice file according to the play times.
  • Duration: Select Duration and enter the delayed play duration. After the alarm event is ended, system will continue to play the voice file according to the duration.

6.4.1.10 Smart Tracking

Alarm is triggered when a tripwire or intrusion behavior is detected. If smart tracking action is configured, the PTZ camera automatically rotates to the target view to track it.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Smart Tracking - 1

● Smart tracking is only available for AI by Camera.
● Smart tracking is only available on the multi-sensor panoramic camera + PTZ camera.

On the event configuration page, select Actions > Smart Tracking to enable the action.

6.4.1.11 Report Alarm

Click Actions and then select Report Alarm to enable this function. Where there is an alarm, the system reports the alarm to alarm center.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Report Alarm - 1

Make sure that alarm center has been enabled. For details, see "6.3.2.8 Alarm Center".

6.4.1.12 Audio and Light Alarm

Set audio and light alarm for IVS detection. When there is an alarm, the system associates with the remote device to perform audio and light actions.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Audio and Light Alarm - 1

Audio and light alarm is available when AI by camera is used for IVS detection and the camera supports this function.

Step 1 Click Actions and select Camera Audio and Remote Warning Light.

Figure 6-50 Camera audio
Camera Audio File Name alarm.wav Play Mode PlayTimes 3 (1-10)

Figure 6-51 Remote warning light
Remote Warning Light Mode Flicker Flicker Frequency Middle Duration 10 Second (5-30)

Step 2 Configure the parameters.

Table 6-18 Audio and light alarm parameters

Parameter Description
Camera AudioFile NameSelect the audio file to be played when an alarm is triggered.
Play Mode Set the playtimes of audio file.
Remote Warning LightModeSelect Flicker or Always on.
Flicker FrequencyWhen Flicker is selected as Mode, set the flicker frequency.
DurationSet how long the warning light flickers or keeps on after an alarm is triggered.

6.4.2 Local Device

Set EVS alarm event, including abnormal event, device offline alarm, AI plan, and local device alarm.

6.4.2.1 One-click Disarming

Disarm alarm linkage actions as needed to avoid interference caused by alarms.

Step 1 Click 🎨 or click + on the configuration page, and then select EVENT.

Step 2 Select the root node in the device tree.

Step 3 Select Overview > Disarming.

Figure 6-52 Disarming
Diaming Diamin by Period Diamin by Period will be valid after one-click diam is disabled Duration of Diamin by Period Default Schedule Add Schedule > Diamin Alarm Linkage Action All Report Alarm Buzan Acosta Remote Device... Brief Multi Push... Projet > Sync Disarm Config with Channels Device

Step 4 Click □ to enable disarming.

Step 5 Cancel selecting alarm linkage actions as needed. The actions are selected by default.

Step 6 (Optional) Configure disarming by period.

1) Click □ to enable disarming by period.

2) Click Add Schedule to specify disarming schedule. The alarm linkage actions remain armed during unscheduled periods.

3) Click Apply.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - One-click Disarming - 2

After disarming by period is enabled, one-click disarming is disabled automatically.

Step 7 Configure sync disarming configuration with channels.

1) Click the drop-down list in the Sync Disarm Config with Channels section. The devices that support one-click disarming or disarming by period are displayed.

2) Select the device that you want to synchronize the disarming configuration with.

Step 8 Click Save.

6.4.2.2 Abnormal Event

Set the alarm mode when an abnormal event occurs.

The Device supports HDD, storage error, network, fan and power fault alarm.

Table 6-19 Abnormal event description

Name Description
No HDDSystem triggers an alarm when there is no HDD. It is enabled by default.
Disk health exceptionSystem triggers an alarm when HDD malfunctions. It is enabled by default.
Storage errorSystem triggers an alarm in case of HDD error, RAID degrade, RAID broken, and storage pool error. It is enabled by default.
Storage fullSystem triggers an alarm when the used storage space reaches the pre-defined threshold. It is disabled by default.The alarm is valid only when the storage mode is set asStopon theLocalHard Diskpage.
Storage pool errorSystem triggers an alarm when an error occurs in the storage pool.
RAID exceptionSystem triggers an alarm in case of RAID exception. It is disabled by default.
Low quota spaceSystem triggers an alarm when the quota space is insufficient, It is enabled by default.
Video frame lossSystem triggers an alarm when the frame loss occurs in the recorded video. It is enabled by default.
IP conflictSystem triggers an alarm when its IP address conflicts with IP address of other device in the same LAN. It is enabled by default.
MAC conflictSystem triggers an alarm when its MAC address conflicts with MAC address of other device in the same LAN. It is enabled by default.
Lock inSystem triggers an alarm when an account login error has reached the threshold. At the same time, system locks current account. It is disabled by default.Go to theSecuritypage to set account error threshold. See "6.7.3 Safety Protection" for detailed information.
Security exceptionSystem triggers an alarm when a security exception occurs. It is enabled by default.
Fan speed alarmWhen EVS fan speed is abnormal, system triggers an alarm. It is enabled by default.
Power faultSystem triggers an alarm when EVS power supply is abnormal. It is disabled by default.
Share serviceSystem triggers an alarm when share service is abnormal. It is enabled by default.
TemperatureSystem triggers an alarm when the temperature of the Device lower than 0 °C or higher than 95 °C. It is enabled by default.
SSD health exceptionSystem triggers ana alarm when an error occurs on the SSD.

Here we use no HDD for example. For other events, the setting steps are similar. See the actual page for detailed information.

Step 1 Click 🎨, or click + on the configuration page, and then select EVENT.

Step 2 Select the root node in the device tree.

Step 3 Select Abnormal Event > No HDD.

Figure 6-53 No HDD
Overview Overview AI Plan AI Plan AI Display Abnormal Event No HDD Disk Health Exception Storage Error Storage Full Storage Pool Error RAID Exception Low Quota Space Video Frame Loss IP Conflict MAC Conflict Lock In Security Exception Fan speed alarm Power Fault Share Service Temperature Device Offline Log | Enable + Actions

Step 4 Click □ to enable no HDD alarm function.

Step 5 Click Actions to set alarm actions. See "6.4.1 Alarm Actions" for detailed information.

Step 6 Click Save.

6.4.2.3 Offline Alarm

Set EVS network offline alarm. If you have not set offline alarm for a specified remote device, once the remote device is disconnected from the system, system adopts EVS alarm strategy to trigger an alarm.

Step 1 Click 🎨, or click + on the configuration page, and then select EVENT.

Step 2 Select the root node in the device tree on the left.

Step 3 Select Device Offline > Device Offline.

Figure 6-54 Offline alarm
Overview Overview AI Plan AI Plan Abnormal Event No HDD ✓ Storage Error ✓ Storage Full ✓ Video Frame Loss ✓ IP Conflict ✓ MAC Conflict ✓ Lock is ✓ Network Security ✓ Exception ✓ Fan speed alarm ✓ Power Fault ✓ AI Module TEMP ✓ AI Module Offline ✓ Device Offline Device Offline Device Alans Device Offline Deployment Time Schedule1 Add Schedule Log | Enable Local Alarm Out | Output Port1 Actions Refresh Save Cancel

Step 4

Click to enable device offline alarm.

Step 5 Click Deployment Time to select schedule from the drop-down list.

After setting deployment period, system triggers corresponding operations when there is a motion detection alarm in the specified period.

  • Click View Schedule to view detailed schedule settings.
  • If the schedule is not added or the added schedule does not meet actual needs, click Add Schedule. See "6.9.3 Schedule" for detailed information.

Step 6 Click Actions to set alarm actions. See "6.4.1 Alarm Actions" for detailed information.

Step 7 Click Save.

6.4.2.4 Configuring AI Plan

Configure AI detection result display strategy of EVS. If you have not set AI display settings for current remote device, the remote device inherits AI display mode of EVS.

6.4.2.4.1 Viewing AI Plan

After adding remote device, on EVS, obtain AI detection type and status of the remote device.

On the EVENT page, select the root node in the device tree on the left. Select AI Plan > AI Plan. The AI Plan page is displayed. See Figure 6-55.

After installing the AI module, and the remote device supports AI detection, and you have enabled the AI detection function, you can view channel name of the remote device on the corresponding AI detection panel.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Viewing AI Plan - 1

indicates that AI by Camera is enabled.

Figure 6-55 AI plan
AI Plan AI Plan AI Display Face Detection IVS Video Detect Device Offline External Alarm AI Plan Face Detection IVS

6.4.2.4.2 Setting AI Display

Set the property that shall be displayed in rule box and feature property panel. View AI detection result through smart preview, and support to display face, human and vehicle.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Setting AI Display - 1

Take the procedure of configuring face detection AI display as an example. For other AI detection functions, the procedures are similar.

Step 1

Click

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Step 1 - 1

or click

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Step 1 - 2

on the configuration page, and then select EVENT.

Step 2

Select the root node in the device tree on the left.

Step 3

Select AI Plan > AI Display > Face.

Figure 6-56 Face
AI Plan AI Plan AI Display Face Detection Video Detect Device Offline External Alarm Markt Load Custonia Face Human Vehicle Non-Motor... Display Filter Age Select Expression Select Discount Select Quality Select Brand Select Face Mask Select Show Tracking Data Face Detection Face Detection Face Detection Features Panel Transparency: 30 Show Trackpoint: 0.0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 Gender Age Expression Climous Face Mask Brand Refresh Save Cancel

Step 4 Configure display filter information.

After setting filter criteria, only the qualified detection result will be displayed. For example, enable Age, and then select youth from the drop-down list. The tracking box and the features panel only display the human face of the youth age.

1) Click □ to enable corresponding filter type.

2) Set display filter criteria.

Click to set the filter color.

Step 5 Click □ in the right of Show Tracking Box to enable.

After enabled, when the system detects face or human, tracking box will be shown beside the face or human in the view window.

Figure 6-57 Tracking box
2018-0 18:02:14 CoatColor CoatShort Bet Color BottomTrusters Human Detection 18:02:14 Human Detection 18:00:40 Human Detection 18:00:40 Human Detection

Step 6 Click ☐ in the right of Features Panel to enable, and select the features that shall be displayed on the LIVE page.

After enabled, there is a features panel on the right side of the view window. See Figure 6-58.

- Drag to adjust features panel transparency. The higher the value, the more transparent the features panel.

- System supports maximum 4 features. System has checked four features by default. To select other features, cancel the selected features, and then select the ones you need.

- Click √ to display the features panel on the LIVE page, including face detection panel and face DB panel.

Figure 6-58 Features panel
2018 16:02:14 CoatColor: CoatShort Bot. Color: Bottom: Trossors Human Detection 16:02:14 Human Detection 18:00:40 Human Detection 18:00:40 Human Detection

Step 7 Click Save.

6.4.3 Remote Device

Set alarm actions of remote device, including video detection alarm, offline alarm and AI plan of remote device.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Remote Device - 1

The parameters might be different depending on the model you purchased.

6.4.3.1 Video Detect

Video detection function adopts the PC visual, image and graphical processing technology to analyze the video image and check there is considerable changes on the video. Once there are considerable video changes (such as there is any moving object, or the video is blurred), system triggers corresponding alarm event.

6.4.3.1.1 Configuring Video Motion

After analyzing video, system can generate a video motion alarm when the detected moving target reaches the sensitivity you set here.

Step 1 Click 🎨, or click + on the configuration page, and then select EVENT.

Step 2 Select remote device in the device tree on the left.

Step 3 Select Video Detect > Video Motion.

Figure 6-59 Video motion
AI Plan Video Detect VideoMotion Snapshot Device Offline External Alarm VideoMotion Debrisuring 1 second (0-100) Click the request to show the info. Name Report Sensitivity 30 Threshold 5 Exclude FTZ Control Deployment Time Record 46 Add Schedule Record | 16 Snapshot | 16 + Action Refresh Save Cancel

Step 4 Click to enable video motion detection.

Step 5 Set parameters.

Table 6-20 Motion detect parameters description

Parameters Description
DebouncingSystem only records one alarm event during the debouncing period.
Exclude PTZ controlAfter enabling exclude PTZ control, system does not trigger an alarm when you are manually control the PTZ.It is for PTZ camera only.

Step 6 Set motion detection region.

System supports maximum four detection zones. After setting, once there is an alarm from any of these four zones, the remote device triggers an alarm.

1) Click motion detection zone icon

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Configuring Video Motion - 2

2) On the surveillance video, press and hold on the left button of mouse to select detection zone.

  • Select the motion detect zone you have drawn. Click 📋 to delete the zone.
  • Click to clear the zone you have drawn.

3) Set parameters.

Table 6-21 Description of zone parameters

ParametersDescription
NameSet detection zone name to distinguish different zones.
SensitivityDrag to set sensitivity.The higher the sensitivity is, the easier it is to trigger an alarm. At the same time, the false alarm rate increases as well. Usually we recommend the default value.
ThresholdDrag to adjust threshold.Once the detected percentage (the percentage of target to detection zone) is equivalent to or larger than the specified threshold, system triggers alarm. For example, the threshold is 10. Once the detected target occupies the 10% of the detection zone, system triggers an alarm.

Step 7 Click Deployment Time to select schedule from the drop-down list.

After setting deployment period, system triggers corresponding operations when there is a motion detection alarm in the specified period.

  • Click View Schedule to view detailed schedule settings.
  • If the schedule is not added or the added schedule does not meet actual needs, click Add Schedule. See "6.9.3 Schedule" for detailed information.

Step 8 Click Actions to set alarm actions. See "6.4.1 Alarm Actions" for detailed information.

Step 9 Click Save.

6.4.3.1.2 Tampering

Once something tampers the surveillance video, and the output video is in one color, the system can generate an alarm.

Step 1 Click 🎨, or click + on the configuration page, and then select EVENT.

Step 2 Select remote device in the device tree on the left.

Step 3 Select Video Detect >Tampering.

Figure 6-60 Tampering
Air Plan Video Defect VoiceAction Targeting Device Offline External Alarm Targeting Deployment Time Add Schedule > Beyond IPC + Direction Refresh Save Cancel

Step 4 Click □ to enable tampering alarm.

Step 5 Click Deployment Time to select schedule from the drop-down list.

After setting deployment period, system triggers corresponding operations when there is a motion detection alarm in the specified period.

  • Click View Schedule to view detailed schedule settings.
  • If the schedule is not added or the added schedule does not meet actual needs, click Add Schedule. See "6.9.3 Schedule" for detailed information.

Step 6 Click Actions to set alarm actions. See "6.4.1 Alarm Actions" for detailed information.

Step 7 Click Save.

6.4.3.2 Offline Alarm

When the remote device and the EVS are disconnected, system can trigger an alarm.

Step 1 Click 🎨, or click + on the configuration page, and then select EVENT.

Step 2 Select a remote device in the device tree on the left.

Step 3 Select Device Offline > Device Offline.

Figure 6-61 IPC offline
Device Offline Deployment Time Schedule1 Add Schedule Log | Enable Actions

Step 4 Click □ to enable offline alarm.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Offline Alarm - 2

The device offline alarm is enabled by default. You can skip this step.

Step 5 Click Deployment Time to select schedule from the drop-down list.

After setting deployment period, system triggers corresponding operations when there is a device offline alarm in the specified period.

  • Click View Schedule to view detailed schedule settings.
  • If the schedule is not added or the added schedule does not meet actual needs, click Add Schedule. See "6.9.3 Schedule" for detailed information.

Step 6 Click Actions to set alarm actions. See "6.4.1 Alarm Actions" for detailed information.

Step 7 Click Save.

6.4.3.3 IPC External Alarm

Set IPC alarm input event, so that when there is an alarm input to the IPC, IPC uploads the alarm to the Device. If the camera has multiple IO channels, you can set the alarm input event for each of them as you might need.

Step 1 Click 🎨, or click + on the configuration page, and then select EVENT.

Step 2 Select a remote device in the device tree on the left.

Step 3 Select External Alarm > IO1.

The IO1 page is displayed. See Figure 6-62.

Figure 6-62 I01
IO1 Name Type NO NC Debouncing 5 Second (0-600) Deployment Time Schedule1 + Add Schedule Log | Enable + Actions

Step 4 Click to enable the alarm.

Step 5 Set parameters.

Table 6-22 Local alarm parameters description

Parameters Description
NameIn the Alarm name box, enter a name for the alarm.
TypeSelect alarm input device type. Both NO and NC are supported.
DebouncingThe system records only one event during this period.

Step 6 Click Deployment Time to select schedule from the drop-down list.

After setting deployment period, system triggers corresponding operations when there is a motion detection alarm in the specified period.

  • Click View Schedule to view detailed schedule settings.
  • If the schedule is not added or the added schedule does not meet actual needs, click Add Schedule. See "6.9.3 Schedule" for detailed information.

Step 7 Click Actions to set alarm actions. See "6.4.1 Alarm Actions" for detailed information.

Step 8 Click Save.

6.4.3.4 Thermal Alarm

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Thermal Alarm - 1

  • Alarm types vary depending on the models of thermal cameras.
  • Make sure that configurations of thermal detections such as fire detection and temperature detection have been done on the thermal camera.

Supports the following thermal camera alarms.

Table 6-23 Thermal alarms

Function Description
Fire alarmWhen the thermal camera detects a fire, the alarm signal is transmitted to the EVS device, which performs an alarm linkage action.
Temperature alarmWhen the thermal camera detects that the temperature is above or below the threshold value, the alarm signal is transmitted to the EVS device, which performs an alarm linkage action.
Temperature difference alarmWhen the thermal camera detects a temperature difference greater than the set value, the alarm signal is transmitted to the EVS device, and the EVS device will perform an alarm linkage action.
Hot spot alarmWhen the maximum temperature detected by the thermal camera is higher than the set value, the alarm signal is transmitted to the EVS device, and the EVS device will perform an alarm linkage action.
Cold spot alarmWhen the lowest temperature detected by the thermal camera is below the set value, the alarm signal is transmitted to the EVS device, and the EVS device will perform an alarm linkage action.

This section uses the procedure of configuring fire alarm as an example. The procedures are similar.

Step 1 Click

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Thermal Alarm - 2

or click

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Thermal Alarm - 3

on the configuration page, and then select EVENT.

Step 2 Select the root node in the device tree on the left.

Step 3 Select Thermal Alarm > Fire Alarm.

Step 4 Click Deployment Time to select schedule from the drop-down list.

After setting deployment period, system triggers corresponding operations when there is a motion detection alarm in the specified period.

  • Click View Schedule to view detailed schedule settings.
  • If the schedule is not added or the added schedule does not meet actual needs, click Add Schedule. See "6.9.3 Schedule" for detailed information.

Step 5 Click Actions to set alarm actions. See "6.4.1 Alarm Actions" for detailed information.

Step 6 Click Save.

6.5 Storage Management

Click 📋 or click + on the configuration page, select STORAGE. Manage storage resources (such as recording file) and space, so you can use and improve utilization ratio of storage space.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Storage Management - 1

The system supports pre-check and routine inspection function, displays health status on the Storage page, so you obtain real-time status of device and avoid data loss.

  • Pre-check: During device operation, the system automatically detects disk status in case of change (start, and insert the disk).
  • Routine inspection: The system carries out routine inspection of the disk continuously. During device operation, the disk might go wrong due to service life, environment and other factors.

6.5.1 Local Hard Disk

The local hard disk refers to the HDD installed on the system. On this page, you can view HDD space (free space/total space), temperature (centigrade/Fahrenheit), HDD information and so on.

Click 📷, or click + on the configuration page, and then select STORAGE > Storage Resource > Local Hard Disk. There is a corresponding icon near the HDD name after you create the RAID and hot spare HDD.

• : RAID HDD.
- : Global hot spare HDD.
- : Invalid HDD of RAID group.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Local Hard Disk - 1

Slight difference might be found on the user interface.

Figure 8-65 HDD
Disk Legend 86.3TB/87.3TB Host 1 / 3 HDD INFO MAD Group Name Drive Letter Model Free Space/Total HDD Type BUS Type Used Type State Sn Power Status Go To HDD01 Idle/ldt 3.43TB/5.43TB DSK SATA Data Normal 2P---------Idle HDD02 Idle/ldt 3.43TB/5.43TB DSK SAS Data Normal NRAADC---------Idle HDD03 Idle/ldp 3.43TB/5.43TB DSK SAS Data Normal NRAADC---------Idle HDD04 Idle/ldj 3.43TB/5.43TB DSK SAS Data Normal NRAADC---------Idle HDD05 Idle/sdt 3.43TB/5.43TB DSK SAS Data Normal NRAADC---------Idle HDD06 Idle/sdt -/2.60TB DSK SAS Data Syne NRAADC---------Idle HDD07 Idle/sdt -/2.60TB DSK SAS Data Syne NRAADC---------Idle HDD08 Idle/sdt -/2.60TB DSK SAS Data Syne NRAADC---------Idle HDD09 Idle/sdt -/2.60TB DSK SAS Data Syne NRAADC---------Idle HDD10 Idle/sdt -/2.60TB DSK SAS Data Syne NRAADC---------Idle Total 24 items: Show up to 100 S1S GO

6.5.1.1 Viewing S.M.A.R.T

S.M.A.R.T is Self-Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology. It is a technical standard to check HDD drive status and report potential problems. System monitors the HDD running status and compares with the specified safety value. Once the monitor status is higher than the specified value, system displays alarm information to guarantee HDD data security.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Viewing S.M.A.R.T - 1

Check one HDD to view S.M.A.R.T information at one time.

On the Local Hard Disk page, select a HDD, and then click S.M.A.R.T. The S.M.A.R.T page is displayed. Check whether the HDD status is OK or not. If there is any problem, fix it in time.

Figure 8-66 S.M.A.R.T
Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Viewing S.M.A.R.T - 2

6.5.1.2 Format

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Format - 1

  • Formatting HDD will clear all data on the HDD. Be careful!
    • Hot spare HDD cannot be formatted.

To format the selected HDDs, enter the Local Hard Disk page, select one or more HDD(s), and click

Format.

6.5.1.3 File System Repair

Once you cannot mount the HDD or you cannot properly use the HDD, you can try to use the File System Repair function to fix the problem.

Enter the Local Hard Disk page, select one or more HDD(s) you cannot mount, and click File System Repair, you can repair the selected file system of the corresponding HDD(s). The repaired HDD can work properly or to be mounted.

6.5.1.4 Viewing RAID Group

Click 📋, or click + on the configuration page, and then select STORAGE > Storage Resource > Local Hard Disk > RAID Group. You can view free space, RAID type, working mode and status of RAID group.

Figure 8-68 RAID group
Disk Legend Spkm 86.3TB/87.3TB Host: 1 : 1 HDD INFO RAID Group Name Free Space/Total RAID Type Working Mode State RAIDS_1 ▶ 7.2TTR/7.2TTR RAIDS Active RAIDS_2 ▶ 7.2TTR/7.2TTR RAIDS Active RAIDS_4 ▶ 10.9TTR/10.9TTR RAIDS Active

- Click ▶ next to the RAID name to display the RAID member list, and then you can view RAID member details.

- Point to the Status column, and then click ⓘ to display the Details page and view RAID group details.

6.5.2 RAID

RAID (Redundant Array of Independent Disks) is a data storage virtualization technology that combines multiple physical HDD components into a single logical unit for the purposes of data redundancy, performance improvement, or both.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - RAID - 1

- The Device supports RAID0, RAID1, RAID5, RAID6, RAID10, RAID50 and RAID60. See "Appendix 2 RAID" for detailed information.

- You are recommended to use enterprise HDD when you are creating RAID, and use surveillance HDD for single-HDD mode.

6.5.2.1 Creating RAID

RAID has different levels such as RAID5, and RAID6. Different RAID levels have different data protection, data availability and performance levels. Create RAID according to your actual requirements.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Creating RAID - 1

Creating RAID operation will clear all data on these HDD. Be careful!

Step 1 Click ⚙, or click + on the configuration page, and then select STORAGE > Storage Resource > RAID > RAID.

Figure 8-69 RAID (1)
RAID Hotspare + Add Refresh Formar File System Repair Working Mode Delete (0) Storage Device Name Free Space/Total RAID Type Working Mode State

Step 2 Click Add.

Figure 8-70 Create RAID (1)
Create RAID HDD Selection Confirm Info Create RAID Manual Auto After creation, the disk you selected will be fo... Storage Device Host(1/12HDD Available) ID) Name Drive Letter Model Free Space.... HDD Type BUS Type Used Type State Power Stat... HDO12 /dev/sda ST800NL- -7.27TB DISK SAS Data Partition E... In use RAID RAIDS Disk Num(3-16) Working Mode Self-Adaptive Name RAIDS_1 Estimated Space: 0 Next Cancel

Step 3 Set RAID parameters.

Select RAID creation type according to actual situation. It includes Manual RAID and Auto RAID.

Manual RAID: System creates a specified RAID type according to the selected HDD amount.

1) Select Manual RAID.
2) Select HDD you want to use.
3) Set parameters.

Table 8-24 Manual creation parameters description

Parameters Description
Storage DeviceSelect storage device of the HDD and select the HDD you want to add to the RAID.Different RAID types need different HDD amounts.
RAIDSelect a RAID type you want to create.
Working ModeSet RAID resources allocation mode. The default setup is self-adaptive.Self- adaptive means the system can automatically adjust RAID synchronization speed according to current business load. When there is no external business, the synchronization speed is at high speed. When there is external business, the synchronization speed is at low speed.Sync first: Allocate resources to RAID synchronization first.Business first: Allocate resources to business first.Load- Balance: Allocate resources to business and RAID synchronization equally.
Name Set RAID name.

Auto: System creates RAID5 according to the HDD amount.

1) Select Auto.

Figure 8-71 Create RAID (2)
Create RAID HDD Selection Confirm Info Create RAID Manual Auto After creation, the disk you selected will be fo... Storage Device Host(1/12HDD Available) Name Drive Letter Model Free Space... HDD Type BUS Type Used Type State Power Stat... HDD12 /dev/sda ST8000N_ -7.27TB DISK SAS Data Partition E_ In use RAID RAIDS -HDD number is 1+5, it cannot be created automatically Working Mode Self-Adaptive Estimated Space: 0 Next Cancel

2) Set parameters.

Table 8-25 Auto parameters description

Parameters Description
Storage DeviceSelect storage device of the HDD.
Working modeSet RAID resources allocation mode. The default setup is self-adaptive.Self-adaptive means the system can automatically adjust RAID synchronization speed according to current business load. When there is no external business, the synchronization speed is at high speed. When there is external business, the synchronization speed is at low speed.Sync first: Allocate resources to RAID synchronization first.Business first: Allocate resources to business first.Load- Balance: Allocate resources to business and RAID synchronization equally.

Step 4 Click Next.

Step 5 Confirm the information.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - 1) Select Auto. - 2

If the input information is wrong, click Back to set RAID parameters again.

Step 6 Click Create.

System begins to create RAID. It displays RAID information after creation.

Figure 8-74 RAID (2)
Stage Online Name Space RAD Type Working Mode State 1 Mode RAD_1 (701.3758) RAD2 Soft Adaption Active Degraded Data Coming

After creating RAID, view RAID disk status and details, clear up RAID, and repair file system.

Table 8-26 RAID operation

Name Operation
View RAID HDD statusView RAID HDD space and status.
View RAID detailsClick 1 to view RAID detailed information.
File System RepairOnce you cannot mount the RAID or you cannot properly use the RAID, you can try to use repair file system function to fix.Enter RAID page, select one or more RAID(s) you cannot mount, click File System Repair, you can repair the selected file system of the corresponding RAID(s). The repaired RAID can work properly or to be mounted.
Modify Working ModeSelect one or more RAIDs, and then click Working Mode to modify the working mode.
Format RAIDEnter RAID page, select one and more RAID groups. Click Format to format the selected RAID.Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Related Operations - 1Formatting RAID is to clear all data on the RAID and cancel the RAID group.Please be careful.
Delete RAIDEnter RAID page, select one and more RAID groups. Click Delete to delete the selected RAID.Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Related Operations - 2Deleting RAID is to clear all data on the RAID and cancel the RAID group.Please be careful.

Figure 8-75 RAID details
Details Name RAID0_1 Drive Letter /dev/md0 RAID Group Host:HDD3,HDD7 RAID Type RAID0 Space 10.91TB/10.91TB Working Mode -- State Active Sync Speed 0.00% Speed 0.00MBps Remaining Time 0.00Min Close

6.5.2.2 Creating Hot Spare HDD

When an HDD of the RAID group is malfunctioning, the hot spare HDD can replace the malfunctioning HDD.

Step 1 Click 🎨 or click + on the configuration page, and then select STORAGE > RAID > Hot spare.

Figure 8-76 Hot spare (1)
RAID Hotspire USB Network OS Storage Device Hotspire Type HDD Name Space RAID Group

Step 2 Click Add.

Figure 8-77 Global hot spare
Add Hotspare ① HDD Selection ② Confirm Info Creation Type Global Hotspare Private Hotspare After creation, the disk you selected will be fo... Storage Device Host(1/24HDD Available) (0) Name Drive Le... Model Free Spa.... HDD Type.. BUS Type Used Type.. State Sn Power St... Next Cancel

Figure 8-78 Private hot spare
Add Hotspare 1 HDD Selection 2 Confirm Info Creation Type Global Hotspare Private Hotspare After creation, the disk you selected will be fo... Add Host:RAID6_3(/dev/md0) (0) Name Drive Le.... Model Free Spa.... HDD Type.. BUS Type Used Type.. State Sn Power St.... HDD24 /dev/sdi HUS728... 4.88TB/... DISK SAS Data Normal VAG1N... Idle Next Cancel

Step 3 Select hot spare creation type.

  • Global hot spare: Create hot spare for all RAID.
  • Private hot spare: Select Private Hot spare and Add it to a RAID group. The private hot spare HDD is for a specified RAID group.

Step 4 Select one or more HDD(s) and then click Next.

Figure 8-79 Confirm info
Add Hotspare HDD Selection Confins Info Hotspare Type: Global Hotspore Hotspare HDD: HostHDD4 Back Create Cancel

Step 5 Confirm info.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Creating Hot Spare HDD - 5

Click Back to select hot spare HDD(s) again if you want to change settings.

Step 6 Click Create to save settings.

System displays the added hot spare HDD information.

Figure 8-80 Hot spare (2)
RAND Software + App C:\Select U2 Storage Device → Hotspot Type → HDD Name Space AWD Group 3 HDD LAN/Fallbox HDD 0 WD_1008 -

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Creating Hot Spare HDD - 7

Select a hot spare HDD and then click Delete, it is to delete hot spare HDD.

6.5.3 Network Hard Disk

Network hard disk is a network-based online storage service that stores device information in the network hard disk through the iSCSI protocol.

6.5.3.1 iSCSI Application

View network hard disk usage, including remaining capacity, and hard disk status.

Click 📋, or click + on the configuration page, and then select STORAGE > Storage Resource > Network Hard Disk > iSCSI Application.

Figure 6-63 iSCSI application
iSCSI Application iSCSI Managem... Format (0) Name Drive Letter Free Space/Total State HDD Operation

  • Select a network hard disk, and then click Format to format the disk. Formatting your hard disk will erase all data from your hard disk, so do it carefully.
  • Click the HDD Operation column, and then you can select an HDD operation permission type.

Read/Write: Read, edit, add, and delete data of this disk.

Read Only: One can only read data of this disk.

6.5.3.2 iSCSI Management

Set up the network disk through iSCSI and map the network disk to the Device so that the Device can use the network disk for storage.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - iSCSI Management - 1

- iSCSI is a networked storage technology that runs SCSI protocols on the IP network.

● The network disk mapped to the Device cannot be used to create a RAID.

- Make sure that service has been enabled on the iSCSI server and the server has provided the shared file directory.

Step 1 Click 📋, or click + on the configuration page, and then select STORAGE > Network Hard Disk > iSCSI Management.

Figure 6-64 Network hard disk
ISCSI Application ISCSI Managem... + Add Refresh Clear No. State IP Address Port User Name Storage Directory Edit

Step 2 Click.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - iSCSI Management - 3

Figure 6-65 Add iSCSI
Add Server IP 1 . 0 . 0 . 1 Port 3260 (3260-65535) Anonymous User Name Username Password Password Storage Directory Seach directory (0) No. Storage Directory OK Cancel

Step 3 Set parameters.

Table 6-24 Network hard disk parameters

Parameters Description
Server IPEnter iSCSI server IP address.
PortEnter iSCSI server port number. It is 3260 by default.
AnonymousIf iSCSI server has no permission limitation, you can select anonymous login.
UsernameIf access permission has been limited when creating the shared file directory on the iSCSI server, you need to enter username and password.
Password
Storage DirectoryClick Search Directory to select the storage directory.The storage directory is generated when the shared file directory is being created on the iSCSI server. Each directory is an iSCSI disk.

Step 4 Click OK.

The added network disk is displayed.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Step 4 Click OK. - 1

  • Click to delete a disk; click Refresh to refresh the disk list.
  • On the Disk Group page, you can configure network disk groups.

6.5.4 FTP/SFTP

Configure FTP/SFTP server for video and picture storage. This section uses configuring SFTP as an example.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - FTP/SFTP - 1

  • FTP is unencrypted transmission, while SFTP is encrypted transmission. You are recommended to use SFTP.
  • When creating SFTP user, you need to configure write permission of SFTP folder. Otherwise, you cannot upload files.
  • You need to purchase or download SFTP tool and install it on your PC.

Step 1 Click 🎨, or click + on the configuration page, and then select STORAGE > SFTP.

Figure 6-66 SFTP
Enable Server IP 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 Port 22 (1-65535) User Name anonymous Password ************ RemoteDirectory share File Size 1024 M (0-65535) ImageUploadInterval 30 Second (1-600) Channel 1 Weekday Sunday Period1 00 : 00 -- 23 : 00 □ Event □ Regular Period2 00 : 00 -- 23 : 00 □ Event □ Regular Test

Step 2 Click □ to enable SFTP.

Step 3 Set parameters.

Table 6-25 SFTP parameters

Parameters Description
Server IP SFTP serverIP address.
PortIt is 22 by default.
User NameThe username and password of the SFTP server.
PasswordYou can keep the username as anonymous, so as to log in in an anonymous way.
Remote DirectoryEnter the SFTP directory.The system automatically establishes folders according to the IP, time, and channel information if you leave the directory empty.Enter the directory name, and then the system creates a folder accordingly under the root directory of SFTP and generates different folders according to the IP, time, and channel information.
File SizeSet the size of the file to be uploaded.If the to-be-uploaded file is larger than the threshold, the system uploads only part of it (the same size with the threshold).If the to-be- uploaded file is smaller than the threshold, the system uploads the whole of it.If the threshold you have set is 0, the system uploads the whole of the file.
Image Upload IntervalSet the upload intervalof images.
ChannelSet the channel number of the video file.
WeekdaySelect the day, the time period, and file type (event file or regular file). The system uploads files in the time periods as you have set.
Period
TestClick Test to test the SFTP connection.

Step 4 Click Save.

6.6 Video Recording

6.6.1 Storage Mode

Allocate disks or RAID groups to different disk groups, and store video and image to specified disk group.

6.6.1.1 Setting Disk Group

Disk and created RAID group are allocated to group 1 by default. You can allocate disk and RAID group to other groups according to your actual needs.

The default number of disk group is the same as the maximum number of HDD that EVS supports.

Step 1 Click 🔒, or click + on the configuration page, and then select STORAGE > VIDEO

RECORDING > Storage Mode > Disk Group.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Setting Disk Group - 1

- The value (such as 1) next to the group name refers to the number of HDD and RAID group in the disk group. If instead, 1 is displayed, it means no available HDD or RAID group in the disk group, but there is video or image stored in the disk group.

● indicates picture storage. ■ indicates video storage.

Step 2 Click a disk group.

Figure 8-84 Disk group
Disk Group Video Image Disk No. Please select disk Query Type type Query Group Set 1 Free Splice/Time 7:24:17:01 Group Set 2 Group Set 3 Group Set 4 Group Set 5 Group Set 6 Group Set 7 Group Set 8 Group Set 9 Group Set 10 Group Set 11 Group Set 12 Group Set 13 Group Set 14 Group Set 15- Group Set 16 Quota Mode Disk(1) You can select disks and RAID and drag them to other disk group to modify group settings. All RAIDS_1

Step 3 Select HDD or RAID group from Disks, and then drag the HDD or the RAID group to another disk group.

Disk grouping takes effect immediately.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Step 2 Click a disk group. - 2

Select All to select all the HDDs and RAID groups of the disk group.

After configuring disk groups, you can also view which disk group the selected disk, video or picture belongs to.

Table 8-28 Disk group functions

Function Description
View the disk group of a disk, video or pictureClick , select a disk or RAID group, and then click Query to search for the disk group that the selected disk or RAID group belongs to.
View disk groups of video or imageSelect Video or Image from , and then-click query to search for disk groups of the selected type.

6.6.1.2 Setting Video/Image Storage

Videos/images of all channels are stored in disk group 1 by default. You can store the videos/images in different disk groups according to actual needs. Two methods are available to set video/image storage.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Setting Video/Image Storage - 1

This section uses storing video for example. To store images, the procedure is similar.

6.6.1.2.1 Method 1: Selecting Disk Group

Step 1 Click 📋, or click + on the configuration page, and then select STORAGE > VIDEO RECORDING > Storage Mode > Video.

Figure 8-85 Video
Disk Group Video Image Batch Process By Channel Name 4 camera2, camera3, camera4, 18, IPC, Cam... Select Disk Group Please select to get disk ... OK Group Set 1 19PGA Available Total 1... Load Balance Device List(F7) You can select device and drag it to other disk group for storage setting. Camera Home All Channel ... Channel IP Address Channel ... Channel IP Address 1 4 96.0-42.0Hz - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Step 2 Select filtering way from the Batch Process drop-down list.

  • By Channel Name: Select channel according to the channel name.
  • By Logical Channel No.: Select channel that is connected to EVS. In this case, Start Channel No. and End Channel No. need to be configured.

Step 3 In the Select Disk Group drop-down list, select target disk group.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Method 1: Selecting Disk Group - 2

In the drop-down list, only disk group with available HDD or RAID group is displayed.

Step 4 Click OK.

Disk grouping takes effect immediately.

6.6.1.2.2 Method 2: Dragging Channel

Step 1 Click 🎨, or click + on the configuration page, and then select STORAGE > VIDEO RECORDING > Storage Mode > Video.

Step 2 Click a disk group.

The linked channels of the disk group are displayed in Device List.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Method 2: Dragging Channel - 1

  • Only disk group with available HDD or RAID group or linked channel is displayed.
  • The value (such as 1) next to the group name refers to the number of HDD and RAID group in the disk group. If instead, 0 is displayed, it means no available HDD or RAID group in the disk group, but there is video or image stored in the disk group.

Figure 8-86 Device list
Disk Group Video Image Batch Process By Channel Name 4, camera2, camera3, camera4, 18, IPC, cam... Select Disk Group Please select target disk ... OK Group Set 1 23FGAvailable Total 1... Load Balance Device List(Y7) You can select device and drag it to other disk group for storage setting. All Channel Channel IP Address Channel Channel IP Address 1 4 camera3 camera3 camera3 camera3 camera3 camera3 camera3 camera3 camera3 camera3 camera3 camera3 camera3 camera3 camera3 camera3 camera3 camera3 camera3 camera3 camera3 camera3 camera3 camera3 camera3 camera3 camera3 camera3 camera3 camera3 camera3 camera3 camera3 camera3

Step 3 (Optional) Click □ to enable load balance, and then the icon turns into blue. To disable it, click it again, and then the icon turns into gray.

  • After load balance is enabled, if one disk group has no usable disk, the video of all channels that belong to this disk group will be stored into all the usable disk groups.
  • When load balance is not enabled, if one disk group has no usable disk, the video of all channels that belong to this disk group will be stored in another usable disk group.

Step 4 Select a channel from the Device list, and drag the channel to the target disk group. Disk grouping takes effect immediately.

6.6.1.3 Enabling Quota Mode

Enable quota mode to set the storage quota for each device.

Step 1 Click 🎨, or click + on the configuration page, and then select STORAGE > VIDEO RECORDING > Storage Mode > Disk Group.

Step 2 Click to enable quota mode.

Step 3 On the Video tab, click in the Device list to set the video quota for a device. Set the storage capacity and reference bit rate, and then the system calculates record duration.

Figure 6-67 Edit video quota
Edit Storage Capacity 0 GB Reference Bit Rate 0 Kbps Record Duration 0 days OK Cancel

Step 4 On the Image tab, click in the Device list to set the quota for a device. Set the storage capacity and reference bit rate, and then the system calculates the number of images that can be stored.

Figure 6-68 Edit image quota
Edit Storage Capacity 0 GB Pic Size 0 KB Number of Images 0 Image(s) OK Cancel

Step 5 On the Quota tab, you can view the total and used quota of each device.

Figure 6-69 Quota information
Disk Group Video Image Quota Device Unit(S1) Export Channel No Camera Name IP Address Image Quota (GB) Used Capacity Of Picture (GB) Video Quota (GB) Used Capacity Of Recorded Video (GB) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Total 512 channels Show up to: 100 20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

6.6.2 Recording Schedule

Configure recording modes and schedules for channels.

6.6.2.1 Recording Mode

Configure recording modes for channels.

Step 1 Click 📋, or click + on the configuration page, and then select STORAGE > VIDEO RECORDING > Schedule.

Step 2 Find the camera for which you want to configure a recording schedule, select the recording methods for the stream types.

• means that the type is selected.
- Substream1 and Substream2 cannot be enabled at the same time.
• Auto: Records automatically according to the schedule.
- Manual: Records around the clock and does not respond to the recording schedule.
- Close: No recording and does not respond to the recording schedule.

Step 3 Select a recording method.

Step 4 (Optional) click □ to disabled the recording schedule configuration of the selected channel

Step 5 Click Save.

Figure 8-87 Recording mode

DEVICE INFORecord ModeTime plan
Main StreamSubstream1Substream2
Channel No.Channel NameAutoManualCloseAutoManualCloseAutoManualCloseGeneralRecord ErrorsPre-Record GroundSetting
127
2Channel2
3PC

6.6.2.2 Recording Schedule

Configure video and picture recording schedules so the Device records and captures pictures as configured in the specified period.

Step 1 Click 🎨, or click + on the configuration page, and then select STORAGE > VIDEO RECORDING > Schedule.

Step 2 Click ⚙, set a recording schedule, and then click OK.

Figure 8-88 Set a recording schedule
Setting Channel No 1 General ✓ Default Schedule + Add Schedule Record Events ✓ Pre-Record 0 Second (0-30) ANR □ 60 Min (1-10080) Record Stream Main Stream Auto Substream1 Close Substream2 Close Instant Record Duration 5 Min (1-30) Manual Snap 1 Image(s) (1-5) Interval 1 Second Event Snap Interval 1 Second (1-3600) Copy to □

Table 6-26 Parameters of recording schedule

Parameter Description
GeneralSelect the checkbox and then click the drop-down list to select a schedule to enable the function. The Device records video according to the selected schedule.
If the schedule is not added or the added schedule does not meet actual needs, click Add Schedule. See "6.9.3 Schedule" for detailed information.
Record EventsEnable Record Events and then set the pre-recording time. When an alarm triggers linkage recording, the Device records the video according to the pre-recording time. For example, if the pre-recording time is 10 seconds, the Device starts recording 10 seconds before the event occurs.
Pre-Record
ANRAutomatic Network Replenishment. When ANR is enabled (by clicking ), the Device will download videos recorded by IPC and stored on camera SD card during network disconnection. Enter the time length of the video to be downloaded from IPC. The Device will download only the defined length of video even if the disconnection is longer.To use this function, make sure that the SD card is installed and recording enabled on the camera.
Record Stream Select stream types and recording modes.
Instant Record DurationThe duration of instant recording. After starting instant recording on the LIVE page, if you do not stop recording, it will automatically stop after the defined duration.
Manual SnapThe number of image captures.
Event SnapThe number of images for each manual capture action. Enter a value to specify the number of seconds between each image.
Copy toCopy the current settings to other channels.

Step 3 Click Save.

6.6.3 Basic

Configure the storage mode when the disk space is used up and the automatic deletion of expired files.

6.6.3.1 Setting Storage Mode

Configure the storage mode when there is no more disk space available.

Step 1 Log in to PCAPP.

Step 2 Click 📋, or click + on the configuration page, and then select STORAGE > VIDEO RECORDING > Storage Mode.

Step 3 Set storage mode when the HDD free space is less than the acceptable threshold.

The acceptable threshold for storage space is 4% of the total space within the range of 150 GB to 200 GB.

- Overwrite: When HDD free space is less than the acceptable threshold, the Device continues to record and the new videos overwrite the oldest files.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Setting Storage Mode - 1

Data will be overwritten in the Overwrite mode. Back up in time.

- Stop: When HDD free space minus the acceptable threshold is less than the defined free space alarm rate of the total space, an alarm is triggered and the Device continues recording until the HDD free space is less than the acceptable threshold.

Figure 6-70 Storage mode
Storage Mode HDD full Overwrite Stop Free Space Alarm 5 %

Step 4 Click Save.

6.6.3.2 Setting Automatic File Deletion

You can enable the Device to automatically delete files older than a certain number of days.

Step 1 Log in to PCAPP.

Step 2 Click ⚙, or click + on the configuration page, and then select STORAGE > VIDEO RECORDING > Storage Mode.

Step 3 Set automatic file deletion.

  • Never: The Device does not delete files automatically.
  • Customize: The Device automatically deletes files older than the configured number of days.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Setting Automatic File Deletion - 1

The deleted files cannot be recovered.

Figure 6-71 Delete expired files
Delete Expired Files Delete Expired Files Customize 6 day(s) ago

Step 4 Click Save.

6.6.4 Record Transfer

When the Device and an IPC are disconnected, the IPC continues to record and stores the recording in the SD card. After the network is recovered, the Device will download the recording during the disconnection from the IPC.

Two ways for record transfer after the network recovers.

  • Automatic download: After the network recovers, the Device automatically downloads the recording in the set time period.
  • Manual download: If ANR is not enabled when you set the recording schedule, after the network recovers, the Device can not automatically download the recording during the disconnection, but the user can manually create the download task.

Step 1 Click ⚙, or click + on the configuration page, and then select STORAGE > VIDEO RECORDING > Record Transfer.

Step 2 Click Add.

Figure 8-90 Add
Add Batch Process By Channel Name 4, camera2, camera3, camera4, 18, IPC, cam... Start Time 2019 - 10 - 23 00 : 00 : 00 End Time 2019 - 10 - 23 23 : 59 : 59 OK Cancel

Step 3 Select By Channel Name or By Channel No. in the Batch Process drop-down list.

Step 4 Set time period of the video to be searched.

Step 5 Click OK.

The transfer progress is displayed.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Record Transfer - 2

Select a transfer task, click Delete to delete it. A task in progress cannot be deleted.

6.7 Security Strategy

Click 🤗 or click + on the configuration page, select SECURITY.

Set security strategy to guarantee device network and data safety. It includes HTTPS, set host IP access rights, enable network security protection.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Security Strategy - 1

HTTPS function is for web interface and PCAPP only. See the actual interface for detailed information.

Figure 6-72 Security center
SECURITY Credential IP Filter Safety Protection System Service Firewall Sync Time Enable HTTPS Compatible with TLSv1.1 and earlier versions There might be security risks if TLS of earlier versions are enabled. Please select carefully. + Create Certificate Install Signature Certificate Installed Certificate H/IP C-CN; ST=none; L=none; O=DAH Download ✗ Urinstall Certificate Contents Issue to: H/IP C-CN; ST=none; L=none; O=OU-RD; EM- Issuer: V/IP-NVI; C-ST; L-; O-; OU-; EM- Validity Period: 2021-12-13 13:06:14-2022-12- 14 13:06:14

6.7.1 HTTPS

HTTPS can use the reliable and stable technological means to guarantee user information and device security and communication data security. After installing the certificate, you can use the HTTPS on the PC to access the Device.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - HTTPS - 1

You are recommended to enable HTTPS service. Otherwise, you might risk data leakage.

6.7.1.1 Installing Certificate

There are two ways to install the certificate.

• Manually create a certificate and then install.
- Upload a signature certificate and then install.

6.7.1.1.1 Installing the Created Certificate

Install the created certificate manually. It includes creating the certificate on the Device, downloading and installing the certificate on the PC.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Installing the Created Certificate - 1

  • Create and install root certificate if it is your first time to use HTTPS or you have changed device IP address.
  • After creating server certificate and installing root certificate, download and install root certificate on the new PC, or download the certificate and then copy to the new PC.

Step 1 Click 🎨, or click + on the configuration page, and then select SECURITY > Credential.

Step 2 Create certificate on the Device.

1) Click Create certificate.

Figure 6-73 Create certificate
Create Certificate • Country • IP/Domain • Term of Validity 365 days Province Position Organization Organization Unit Email OK Cancel

2) Set country, IP/domain, valid date and so on.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Installing the Created Certificate - 3

● Country, IP/domain, and valid date are required items. Other items are optional.
- IP/domain shall be the Device IP or the domain.

3) Click OK.

System begins to install certificate, and then displays certificate information after the installation.

Step 3 Download certificate.

1) Click.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Step 3 Download certificate. - 1

2) Click Save File to select file saved path.

3) Click Save.

System begins downloading certificate file.

Step 4 Install root certificate on the PC.

1) Double-click the certificate.
System displays Open file-security warning page.
2) Click Open.
3) Click Install Certificate.
4) Follow the prompts to import the certificate.
System goes back to Certificate page.

Step 5 Click OK to complete certificate installation.

Figure 6-74 Installed certificate
Enable HTTPS Compatible with TLSv1.1 and earlier versions There might be security risks if TLS of earlier versions are enabled. Please select carefully. + Create Certificate Install Signature Certificate Installed Certificate H/IP= C=CN; ST=none; L=none; ↓ Download × Uninstall Certificate Contents issue to: H/IP= C=CN; ST=none; L=none; O=none; OU=none; EM= Validation Period: 2021-09-12 19:18:31-2022-09- 13 19:18:31

6.7.1.1.2 Installing Signature Certificate

Upload signature certificate to install.

Preparation

Before installation, make sure that you have obtained safe and valid signature certificate.

Procedure

Step 1 Click 🎨, or click + on the configuration page, and then select SECURITY > Credential. Figure 6-75 Credential
Enable HTTPS Compatible with TLSv1.1 and earlier versions There might be security risks if TLS of earlier versions are enabled. Please select carefully. + Create Certificate Install Signature Certificate Installed Certificate H/IP= C=CN; ST=none; L=none; ↓ Download × Uninstall Certificate Contents Issue to: H/IP= C=CN; ST=none; L=none; O=none; OU=none; EM=: Validity Period: 2021-09-12 19:18:31-2022-09- 13 19:18:31

Step 2 Click Install Signature Certificate.

Step 3 Click Browse and then select certificate and credential file.

Step 4 Click Install.

System begins to install certificate, and then displays certificate information after the installation.

Step 5 Install the root certificate on the PC.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Procedure - 2

This root certificate is the one obtained with signed certificate.

6.7.1.2 Enabling HTTPS

After you install the certificate and enable HTTPS function, you can use the HTTPS on the PC to access the Device.

Step 1 Click 🎨, or click + on the configuration page, and then select SECURITY > Credential.

Step 2 Click to enable HTTPS function.

Step 3 Click ir enable Compatible with TLSv1.1 and earlier versions.

Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Enabling HTTPS - 1

TLS (Transport Layer Security) provides privacy and data integrity between two communications application programs.

Figure 6-76 Credential
Enable HTTPS Compatible with TLSv1.1 and earlier versions There might be security risks if TLS of earlier versions are enabled. Please select carefully. + Create Certificate Install Signature Certificate Installed Certificate H:\IP~30\IP\14=1\ML; C-CN; ST=none; L=none Download Uninstall Certificate Contents issue to: H/\IP-_________________, C

Step 2 Click Uninstall. Step 3 Click OK to uninstall the certificate.

6.7.2 Configuring Access Permission

Set the specified IP addresses to access the Device, to enhance device network and data security. Step 1 Click 🎨, or click + on the configuration page, and then select SECURITY > IP Filter. Figure 6-78 IP Filter ![](images/ed0fc520d524072777c7c602b3905699ddbb92967b00fdf87d8237ac5bbf108d.jpg) Step 2 Select IP access rights. - Allow all access: It is to allow all IP addresses in the same IP segment to access the Device. - Reject access list: It means the IP address in the list cannot access the Device. - Allow access list: It means the IP address in the list can access the Device. Step 3 Add IP host. ![](images/50029d3b25d56fb0f20ae8250ca348a1803c07f02285b1f94498cbaf3c7511bc.jpg) The following steps are to set reject access list or allow access list. 1) Click Add. Figure 6-79 Add ![](images/7c2a6d14e568c51ffeb4b17e113516d076af2ad9a603f5a01cefa12238496765.jpg) 2) Select Add Type, and set IP address or MAC address of IP host. - Single IP: Enter host IP address. - IP segment: Enter IP segment. It can add multiple IP addresses in current IP segment. • MAC: Enter MAC address of IP host. 3) Click OK to add the IP host. System displays added IP host list. ![](images/6c42cf0bd8da287eeb428db142f7e376a9d7b1c30416682bb78d9b77957ba2e3.jpg) \- Click Add to add more IP hosts. \- Click to edit the IP host. \- Select an IP host and then click Delete to delete. Step 4 Click Save.

6.7.3 Safety Protection

Set the login password lock strategy once the login password error has exceeded the specified threshold. System can lock current IP host for a period of time. Step 1 Click 📋, or click + on the configuration page, and then select SECURITY > Safety Protection. Figure 6-80 Safety protection (1) ![](images/6901c2fba24fd0c8e9a62f1a1a1d8eb4b4c91a4769ff69070a463308313732f8.jpg) Step 2 Click to enable security protection function. \- Remote: When you are using web interface, PCAPP to access the Device remotely, once the login password error has exceeded the threshold, system locks the IP host for a period of time. \- Local: When you are accessing local menu of the Device, once the login password error has exceeded the threshold, system locks the account for a period of time. Step 3 Set lock strategy according to the actual situation. Step 4 Click Save. Once the IP host has been locked, you can view the locked IP host on the list. Select an IP host and then click Unlock, or click the 🔒 of the corresponding IP host to unlock. Step 5 (Optional) Click Login lock event to go to the Event page where you can select Abnormal Event > Lock in to configure a Lock in event.

6.7.4 Enabling System Service Manually

Enable system services for third-party access. Step 1 Click 📄, or click + on the configuration page, and then select SECURITY > System Service. Figure 6-81 System service ![](images/9593e62f590d61858065781df6a8184de8a4a886602114da1c2b79e0fc928cdf.jpg) Step 2 Enable or disable system service according to your actual situation. Table 6-27 System service
System service Description
SSHAfter enabling this function, you can access EVS through SSH protocol to carry out system debugging and IP configuration. This function is disabled by default.You are recommended to disable this function. Otherwise there might be security risks.
System service Description
Mobile Phone PushAfter enabling this function, you can access EVS with mobile phone client, to receive information from EVS.You are recommended to disable this function. Otherwise there might be security risks.
CGI EnableAfter this function is enabled, third-party platform can connect EVS through CGI protocol.You are recommended to disable this function. Otherwise there might be security risks.
ONVIF EnableAfter this function is enabled, other devices can connect EVS through ONVIF protocol.You are recommended to disable this function. Otherwise there might be security risks.
Run LogAfter enabling it, you can view system running logs in Intelligent Diagnosis > Run Log.
Password Expires inConfigure the password expiration interval. The Device prompts you to change the password when the password expires.
Audio/Video Transmission EncryptionWhen this function is enabled, stream transmission will be encrypted.You are recommended to enable this function. Otherwise you might risk data leakage.
RTSP over TLSEnable this function to encrypt stream transmission.You are recommended to enable this function. Otherwise you might risk data leakage.
Private Protocol Authentication ModeSelect a private protocol authentication mode between security mode and compatible mode. Security mode is recommended.
Step 3 Click Save.

6.7.5 Configuring Firewall

Enhance network and data security by prohibiting Ping and half-connection. - PING Prohibited: When PING Prohibited is enabled, the Device does not respond to Ping requests. - Anti Half Connection: When Anti Half Connection is enabled, and the Device can provide service normally under half-connection attack. Step 1 Click ![](images/5d81c8ccc6f901e20481952d4e804e3dfeb07d527d83e49d387c522118b47292.jpg) or click ![](images/8c1a91065978b630430b9bb5e38f38e5f404b614a83364593b9728bb005e7b51.jpg) on the configuration page, and then select SECURITY > Firewall. Figure 6-82 Firewall ![](images/1f7e5a26fde3a912612dcd0a6fe5203e05be2e20c0a9b76844879210fd2f1ddc.jpg) Step 2 Click □ to enable PING Prohibited or Anti Hal Connection. Step 3 Click Save.

6.7.6 Configuring Time Synchronization Permission

Configure permissions of time synchronization actions from other devices or servers. Step 1 Click 🎨, or click + on the configuration page, and then select SECURITY > Synch Time. Figure 6-83 Sync time ![](images/00aff2828f40dd2c4a3ac020072fd0e4992b8344e282e0533ed770f29d594a82.jpg) Step 2 Click □ to enable time synchronization restriction. Step 3 Click the Allowlist or Blocklist tab. - Hosts in the allowlist have the permission to synchronize time of the Device. - Hosts in the blocklist cannot synchronize time of the Device. Step 4 On the Allowlist page or the Blocklist page, add hosts. 1) Click Add. Figure 6-84 Add a host ![](images/b97c95812471e78a6d416481a7a92d810527a3558cb625b49b8dc127afb0a2e0.jpg) 2) Select an IP version, and then enter an IP address. 3) Click OK. Step 5 Click Save. You can also perform the following functions. Table 6-28 Other functions
Function Description
Edit IP addressClick to edit IP address.
Delete IP addressClick to delete a host from the list.
Configure IP address permissionClick the corresponding of each host, so as to enable the allowlist or blocklist configuration for the host.Click to disable the allowlist or blocklist configuration for the host.

6.8 Account Management

Device account adopts two-level management mode: user and user group. You can manage their basic information. To conveniently manage the user, we recommend the general user authorities shall be lower than high-level user authorities. ![](images/9a4c304a0b1031bfb92b0eeda062c6be6b1282ba729a32c536a9695fa625f54e.jpg) \- To ensure device safety, enter correct login password to operate on the Account page (for example, add or delete user). \- After a correct login password is entered on Account page, if you do not close Account page, you can do other operations directly. If you close the page and enter it again, you shall enter the correct login password again.

6.8.1 User Group

Different users might have different authorities to access the Device. You can divide the users to different groups. It is easy for you to maintain and manage the user information. ● System supports maximum 64 user groups. User group name supports maximum 64 characters. ● System has two default user groups (read-only): admin and ONVIF. • Create new user group under the root.

Adding User Group

Step 1 Click 🎨, or click + on the configuration page, and then select ACCOUNT. Step 2 Select the root node in the device tree on the left and then click at the lower-left corner. Figure 6-85 Input password ![](images/04acf544fd11382353eceb502a9dbaf65be90d7753c95d5a6cf0e8ecc955298d.jpg) Step 3 Enter current user's login password, and then click OK. Figure 6-86 User group property ![](images/d066456bd89983e0ea6f7b48dd506f60954e80c984355c527cc96d75f5865a15.jpg) Step 4 Set parameters. Table 6-29 User group
Parameters Description
NameSet user group name.The name should consist of 1 to 64 characters and contain English letters, number and special characters.
Group nameDisplays user group organization node. System automatically recognizes the group name.
DescriptionEnter user group description information.
User listDisplays user information of current group.

Step 5 Select user authority.

1) Click Authority tab. Figure 6-87 Authority ![](images/71b01ae2c2aeccd0530bc9b775d6c7d8e08f8f5949d3420ba145b07de5b33d9c.jpg) 2) Set user group authorities according to actual situation. • : means it has the corresponding authority. \- Check the box at the top of the authority list (such as (0) Authority Control) to select all authorities of current category. Step 6 Click Save.

Deleting user group

![](images/657ef896b83d31b7c2e216ca58c361d5733f145874f63d629449d727d68bb1c3.jpg) - Before you delete a user group, delete all users of current group first. User group cannot be restored after being deleted. Be cautious. - Admin and ONVIF user cannot be deleted. Step 1 Click ![](images/97f7d9555212645a24b6384968c5993b43259284e6e1269a00c56264d011bd82.jpg) or click ![](images/5e8d246cc0ed00d71d24845f0a88168e3399f6cede84294f35e234fd2c72d305.jpg) on the c Step 2 Select user group and click . ![](images/02f6f3e4088bd41a7eff49eacbb44c85e5262e78195f314e03d5cf0c4e650526.jpg) Figure 6-88 Enter password ![](images/4ecf8e4ff48a21e1843f23169c52ba3357fc0baaf48f5ba784dc0b0de850b940.jpg) Step 3 Enter current user's login password, and then click OK. The following prompt page is displayed. Step 4 Click OK.

6.8.2 Device User

The device user is to access and manage the Device. System default administrator is admin. It is to add a user and then set corresponding authorities, so that the user can access the resources within its own rights range only. ![](images/7489c60029059674aca16b2ab2c16b4953ab7d0d3e39cc6b4ee1a4c48cb9cf19.jpg) User authorities adopt the user group authorities settings. It is read-only.

Procedure

Step 1 Click 🎨, or click + on the configuration page, and then select ACCOUNT. Step 2 Select admin user group or other newly added user group, and then click 📋+ at the lower-left corner. Figure 6-89 Enter password ![](images/7a8b0d8e56e70fd6a173f024922d9d0b7f25d468f9e647a2443cc90ce9d137ab.jpg) Step 3 Enter current user's login password, and then click OK. Figure 6-90 Property ![](images/245c1831ae4b35dbcabfcaa22a149a728691e2c63fd4b7df515822ca797f7b73.jpg) Step 4 Set parameters. Table 6-30 User management
Parameters Description
NameSet username.The name ranges from 1 to 31 characters. It can contain English letters, numbers and special characters (_@).
Group nameDisplays user organization node. System automatically identifies it.
PasswordIn the new password box, enter the new password and enter it again in the Confirm Password box.The password should consist of 8 to 32 non-blank characters and contain at least two types of characters among uppercase, lowercase, number, and special character (excluding '";: &). Usually we recommend the strong password.
ConfirmPassword
DescriptionDescribe the user.
Step 5 (Optional) Click the Authority tab to view user authority. Figure 6-91 Authority ![](images/9b6517ac48a338f9b0ab0676e1c134cfbd7efab5302f286302ada6d296e1676c.jpg) Step 6 Click Save. After adding a user, you can modify user information or delete the user. For details, see Table 6-31. ![](images/85b3e00ef4c4c0567e928d7342287c29d8bd844d192addb014a233ed518e9d38.jpg) The user with account management authority can change its own and other users' information. Table 6-31 User operation
Name Operation
Edit user informationSelect a user from user list. The Property page of the user is displayed, and the user's login password and description information can be modified.
Delete Userct a user from user list, and then click Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Related Operations - 1 to delete.Before deleting online user, shield the user first. For details, see "8.6 Network Care".User information cannot be restored after being deleted. Be cautious.

6.8.3 Password Maintenance

Maintain and manage user's login password.

6.8.3.1 Changing Password

Change user's login password.

Changing Password of the Current User

Step 1

Click

![](images/8ccaa58bbbb2868a11056deb55d21a801d6e6504550e8c1dabdf21c094034ee2.jpg) at the upper-right corner, and then select Change Password. Figure 6-92 Change password ![](images/635cefbc945252cd23404bab965243d997885175da69b2d5bf54d8f64d6bc870.jpg) Step 2 Enter old, new and confirmed password. ![](images/cce5ce314d4bbcba092cfb0948c92c68e1d3d3765d5b52b8c0c5fa41255f67ca.jpg) When you enter a character that is not allowed, 9 appears and the character will be deleted automatically. Step 3 Click OK.

Changing Password of Other User

![](images/eba1d25d9d5179e876695d669d0f92f30878d3257f0b160e064b7feb56f284a8.jpg) Only Admin account supports this function. Step 1 Click 🎨, or click + on the configuration page, and then select ACCOUNT. Step 2 Select a user. Figure 6-93 Property ![](images/c33be4c958f4ef685b5c1760f7fda90bdb73e8c1c8b570c4eab253bd85ab23ea.jpg)

Step 3 Click.

![](images/2e821f8961e3fefeda22d819227c8981623a4bc3b5f2bb35e1f9a9802464438e.jpg) Figure 6-94 Input password ![](images/e611c1b5af282b0effab3c98e42f31e43f757dfe8770b5a0ff765cb7299b24e2.jpg)

Step 4 Enter current user's login password, and then click OK.

Figure 6-95 Change password ![](images/6eda4ff4eb40f69e690c086371bb47862477f443bb5ae34f0863d1361aa2e58b.jpg)

Step 5 Enter old, new and confirmed password.

Step 6 Click OK.

6.8.3.2 Resetting Password

You can use email address to reset password once you forgot it.

Enable password reset

Enable the password reset function, and then leave an email address for password reset. Step 1 Click 🎨, or click + on the configuration page, and then select ACCOUNT. The Account page is displayed. Step 2 Select the root node in the device tree on the left. The Password Reset page is displayed. Step 3 Click □ to enable the password reset function. Step 4 Enter an email address for resetting password. Step 5 Click Save.

Reset password

![](images/c4b1521b100e2a00e2e735ec13276c9a13d3fddfd947c283fc376f272c00a373.jpg) • Make sure that the password reset function is enabled. • Make sure that the email address for password reset is set. Step 1 Go to the login page of the Device. Figure 6-96 Login ![](images/bfcb0c7d7aa1496a909d9395f9439c477af5c9e53f21a222adb008120646edc2.jpg)

Step 2 Click Forgot Password?

- If you have not set the email address information, you cannot reset password. Contact your technical support for help. - If you have set the email address information, the following prompt is displayed. Figure 6-97 Prompt ![](images/f074a373db5262e8ce1e27526c2feea3c18a49bad595621000faa839240ab4eb.jpg)

Step 3 Click OK.

The QR code page is displayed. Figure 6-98 Scan QR code ![](images/bbbff56c86c2c001cc838db6ac1fc9e4104c481ae84bad6c258e3f5745dd3266.jpg) Step 4 Follow the on-screen instructions to obtain the security code. Enter the security code that you received in the security code box. ![](images/d83a2763bca7d04aea22e68ffabd29c083895250fc116f05bc71eb4e60fe4636.jpg) - You can get security codes twice by scanning the same QR code. If you need to get the security code once again, refresh the page. - Use the security code to reset the password within 24 hours; otherwise the security code becomes invalid.

Step 5 Click Next.

The new password setting page is displayed. Figure 6-99 New password setting ![](images/6a6fddfdfb31d64b7f8d0d7de1c530c8ffbd916fe23967aa54cdfeb92a36ad81.jpg) Step 6 Set parameters. Table 6-32 Description of password parameters
Parameters Description
UserThe default username is admin.
PasswordIn the New Password box, enter the new password and enter it again in the Confirm Password box.The password should consist of 8 to 32 non-blank characters and contain at least two types of characters among upper case, lower case, number, and special characters (excluding '' ; : & and space). Enter a strong password according to the password strength indication.
ConfirmPassword

Step 7 Click Confirm Modify.

You can log in with the new password.

6.8.4 ONVIF

When the remote device is connecting with the Device through ONVIF protocol, use the verified ONVIF account. ![](images/2e9438ab9102a8fe9aca9992aa7b40f20efb71d4adb5466056c61280be5791ce.jpg) - System adopts three ONVIF user groups (admin, user and operator). You cannot add ONVIF user group manually. - You cannot add user under ONVIF group directly.

Adding ONVIF User

Step 1 Click 🎨, or click + on the configuration page, and then select ACCOUNT. Step 2 Select user group under ONVIF. Figure 6-100 ONVIF ![](images/cb5531c3220fcff839960b3ea25a008934baed964f11e916195dc84a625e859a.jpg) Step 3 Click at the lower-left corner of the Property page. Figure 6-101 Input password ![](images/fde901502ab6b785266836416507b31ce668a5cd07ffd40ba2947e04d50cd3f6.jpg) Step 4 Enter the login password of current user, and then click OK. Figure 6-102 ONVIF property ![](images/b3c6b312ec5a6a7af0dd49c2a9c3b4cbdf8b5726ca0f8a2944715812b88e84a5.jpg) Step 5 Set parameters. Table 6-33 ONVIF parameters description
Parameters Description
User NameSet ONVIF username.The name ranges from 1 to 31 characters. It can contain English letters, number and special character (_@.).
Group nameDisplays user organization node. System automatically identifies it.
PasswordSet ONVIF user password.The password should consist of 8 to 32 non-blank characters and contain at least two types of characters among upper case, lower case, number, and special characters (excluding '";: & and space).
ConfirmPassword
DescriptionEnter ONVIF user description information.
Step 6 Click Save.

Delete ONVIF User

![](images/b1f32b434ee6879e176e83141457a790522e58ecf3104e2add1e5e40ca259b85.jpg) Deleting the admin account is not supported. Step 1 Click 🎨, or click + on the configuration page, and then select ACCOUNT. Step 2 Select an ONVIF user and click 🎨. Figure 6-103 Input password ![](images/77dcd511d65de4a85bde35276cd16250d4009413264de7f59a9afd86d847a355.jpg) Step 3 Enter current user's login password, and then click OK. The following prompt page is displayed. Step 4 Click OK.

6.9 System Configuration

Click 🎨 or click + on the configuration page, select SYSTEM. The SYSTEM page is displayed. Set system basic settings, such as general parameters, time, display parameter, schedule, and voice.

6.9.1 Setting System Parameters

Set system language, standard, user logout time, virtual keyboard, and mouse moving speed. Step 1 Click 🎨, or click + on the configuration page, and then select SYSTEM > General > System. Figure 6-104 Configuresystem settings ![](images/ed3b451a8f16a9bc483b20d500ea2cc491281f14514b5e233e236b3a408aef16.jpg) Step 2 Set parameters. Table 6-34 System parameters description
Parameters Description
LanguageSet system language.
StandardSelect video standard.PAL is mainly used in China, Middle East and Europe.NTSC is mainly used in Japan, United States of America, Canada and Mexico.As a technical standard of processing video and audio signals, PAL and NTSC mainly differ in encoding, decoding mode and field scanning frequency.
User Logout TimeSet automatic logout interval for log-time inactivity. After auto logout, the user needs to log in again to operate.If you set asNo Logout, system does not automatically log out.
Sync Remote DeviceClickto enable the function. If enabled, the language, standard and time settings configured here will be synchronized to all the connected remote devices.
Standby Board Real-Time Transmission ServiceAfter enabling this function, when the client requests real-time streams, streams will be transferred from the standby board first, and the pre-record of the standby board is enabled automatically to ensure data integretiy during main/sub switch.
Step 3 Click Save.

6.9.2 System Time

Set system time, and enable NTP function according to your need. After enabling NTP function, device can automatically synchronize time with the NTP server. Step 1 Click 🎨, or click + on the configuration page, and then select SYSTEM > General > Time. Figure 6-105 Time ![](images/72c78298704f141957e620d72f5f8e56f9d46f17106c5c919bfc6e797a328c96.jpg) Step 2 Set parameters. Table 6-35 System parameters description
Parameters Description
TimeSet system date and time. You can set manually or set device to synchronize time with the NTP server.Manual Setting: Select Manual Setting and then set the actual date and time in the following two ways.Click , and then set the time and date in the calendar.Click Sync to synchronize device time with your PC.When using IE11, Google Chrome75 or Firefox61 and later versions, on the web interface of the Device, click Sync to synchronize both device time and time zone with the PC.When using earlier versions of browser, on the web interface of the Device, click Sync to synchronize only device time with PC.Sync with the Internet Time Server: Check the box and then enter NTP server IP address or domain, and then set Auto Sync Time Interval.
Time and Date FormatSet time and date display format.
Time Zone Set devicetime zone.
Parameters Description
Auto Time SynchronizationAfter enabling this function, EVS detects system time of remote device once in every interval. When time of remote device is inconsistent with EVS time, EVS will calibrate the time of remote device automatically.
Step 3 (Optional) Set DST. ![](images/6b17c1e25e418cd40eb4407661270407b85a90eca3950d903bf6776eb467d823.jpg) DST is a system to stipulate local time, in order to save energy. If the country or region where the Device is located follows DST, you can enable DST to ensure that system time is correct. 1) Click □ to enable DST. 2) Select DST mode. It includes Date and Week. 3) Set DST start time and end time. Step 4 Click Save.

6.9.3 Schedule

Set schedule. When you are configuring alarm, record arm/disarm period, system can call the schedule directly. System only triggers the corresponding operations during the specified schedule. ![](images/dd0aed2be222d31096af0a089eb24fb1959ea0d47e6a47c0b842a4c9a6a5bce9.jpg) Default schedule has been created by default. Default schedule is Always Effective, and cannot be modified or deleted. Step 1 Click 🎨, or click + on the configuration page, and then select SYSTEM > Schedule > Schedule. Figure 6-106 Schedule ![](images/7bbbaa709589dd0528d98551391d3f5f000a07508c99bf206a9523cf5d8ad26d.jpg) Step 2 Add schedule. 1) Click. ![](images/d15d88b7d2ff5536e3771938c6bc35abfeb0b8312a3a73125cf31bc1f153c9b0.jpg) The Add Schedule page is displayed. Figure 6-107 Adding schedule ![](images/762e825663c22aa54171234d26c19919c618b7d4a0af96796079599644b0e4e8.jpg) 2) Set schedule name. 3) Click OK to save the configuration. Step 3 Set valid time period. It includes Always Effective and Customize. Step 4 Set validity period of schedule. ![](images/f9361a29f62b19b437c70be2ab2a3063a8be6ed999ea7eab46eed307348d43c9.jpg) • The step is for customized mode only. • Each calendar supports maximum 50 validity periods. - The blue area on the time bar means the validity period. On the time bar, you can: - Click the blue area, and is displayed. Drag to adjust the start time and end time of validity period. - Press the any blank space on the time bar, and drag to the right to add a validity period. - Click Clear to clear all validity periods of current schedule. - Select a validity period, and then click Delete to delete the period. Step 5 Click Save. ![](images/095796516e8499608e6825bc0ec30c0a995ce85aaef000ef3a4459dac3569b82.jpg) Select an added schedule, and then click to delete.

6.10 Network Storage

Network storage is a storage technology based on IP network. After you create a storage pool, you can share your storage directory with other devices through iSCSI. Figure 6-108 Configuring network storage ![](images/46230381066ce86c9851979856a9ff5daff574197230336a423c9c880e3b04d6.jpg)
flowchart
graph TD
    A["Start"] --> B["Create Storage Pool"]
    B --> C["Create Share Account"]
    C --> D["Create Share Folder"]
    D --> E["Enable Share Service"]
    E --> F["End"]

6.10.1 Creating Storage Pool

Storage pool is a logical storage space after the storage device is virtualized. It is managed by the system, and can be composed of multiple actual disks or RAID. Network storage is one of the major means to realize storage virtualization. ![](images/17cd1dc73e7f809d6df3597c1650da8cd1e4af44aec429d0d487f6fe6be0dc41.jpg) Creating storage pool will format the disk. Step 1 Click 🎨, or click + on the configuration page, and then select Network Storage > Storage Pool. Figure 6-109 Storage pool ![](images/25aa1a86acae0eb0ee7d4aecfaf01aeda1d9cd63fa947edcbd804d332bbf98f4.jpg) Step 2 Click Add. Figure 6-110 Create storage pool ![](images/92c10f2f155ee5c3d10ff422280a7851e85e41b11180d4eebec0fe69b3d72dc6.jpg) Step 3 Name the pool, and then select a disk or RAID group. ![](images/38a99b349c6c751f4f6ac5b1c169c1b78a1b5b2bb4bde279e331f17150fd5e6f.jpg) By default, in the Device Name column, "sdx" (x ranges from a to z) is a disk, such as /dev/sda, and "mdx" (x is number) is a RAID group, such as /dev/md0. Step 4 Click OK. The confirmation dialogue box is displayed. Step 5 Click OK. The system starts to create storage pool. ![](images/624ccf42aae3b1e86c526b5cb834faa95c150287cdc1524524cad8f66bc43051.jpg) • To delete a pool, click 📄. • To refresh the storage pool list, click Refresh.

6.10.2 Managing Share Account

Use share account to access the shared folder. Step 1 Click 📁, or click ![](images/6142d6acee90add158c56b25fb31a47d33eb5c2c699bf2f4e59d49ccccffc598.jpg) on the configuration page, and then select Network Storage > Share Account. Figure 6-111 Share account ![](images/d3eda01e50e614555546334df43aaf75e5271f1b6a95925c41ddaef0e925d77f.jpg) Step 2 Click Add. Figure 6-112 Add user ![](images/8db2be75f1f6964125c8d83e9a7608e910f684ca0815c44c450575cbe55c495d.jpg) Step 3 Set parameters. Table 6-36 Parameters description
ParametersDescription
User Name Name the user.
Service TypeYou can select ISCSI, FTP/SAMBA, ISCSI/FTP/SAMABA.
PasswordSet a password for the user.
Confirm passwordThe password shall be 12-digit if the service type is iSCSI.
RemarkSet the remark information for identifying the user.
Step 4 Click OK.

6.10.3 Configuring Share Folder

Configure the share folders that other users can access remotely. Step 1 Click 🎨, or click + on the configuration page, and then select Network Storage > Share Folder. Figure 6-113 Share folder ![](images/4b8575f0259e9af22c685be33b633888baa429bbff0f0dd8261d94d47529ed3f.jpg) Step 2 Click Add. Figure 6-114 Add (iSCSI) ![](images/d77cc4d430519ab2f89abea35a80efc79eff942ab28ba0d47e7553de6cbf153f.jpg) Step 3 Set parameters. Table 6-37 Parameters description
Parameters Description
Directory NameName the folder.
Pool NameSelect a pool.The available free space of the selected pool is displayed beside the pool name.
Share CapacitySet the space of the folder.
Block SizeSet the block size of the folder, such as 512 Byte, 1024 Byte, 2048 Byte and 4096 Byte.Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Configuring Share Folder - 1You need to set block size when the service type is iSCSI.
Descriptipon(Optional) Describe the folder for the ease of identifying it.
Share TypeYou can only select iSCSI.
Cache TypeSet the cache strategy of the share folder, includingWrite-backandDirect-write.Direct-write: Write data directly into be disk and refresh the cache data. You are recommended to select direct-write when you have less data to store and have a high requirement for data integrity.Write-back: Write data into the cache, and then store it into the disk when the cache is full or system is available. You are recommended to select write-back when you have much more data to store and have a low requirement for data integrity.Dahua Technology EVS7124D-V2 - Configuring Share Folder - 2You need to select the cache type when the service type is iSCSI.
Step 4 Click OK. ![](images/cd25216c6f0992ebfaae024ed8477d70c08091f22e51dfc3e2265ba03744bf24.jpg) \- The system forces to disable automatic maintenance the first time you create a share folder, or when you create a folder when automatic maintenance is enabled automatically. Once you have configured network storage, you can manually enable automatic maintenance. For details, see "8.7.3 Automatic Maintenance". - Click 📋 to delete a share folder; click 📋 to edit a share folder; click Refresh to refresh the current configuration. - Modifying cache type takes effect after the Device restarts.

6.10.4 Configuring Share Control

Users can access the share folders only when the share service is enabled. Step 1 Click 🎨, or click + on the configuration page, and then select Network Storage > Share Control. Figure 6-115 Share control ![](images/30a93f0db5bba23662221c21dd8ea11a01f51586c069354f2f5e5241b8039915.jpg) Step 2 Click ![](images/25874856edf61731a3e8054a2c1eaeeae07d2cdb8871812040e1de226db0f63c.jpg) to enable share service; click ![](images/d9e0ed02cac0bdb5dc02395adeee65ae6e0b73a3b62941bb8a3c542b2a04a01b.jpg) to disable share service. Step 3 Click OK.

6.10.5 Configuring FTP Parameters

Configure FTP parameters to store videos and images to FTP server. Step 1 Click ![](images/f034f8a1622e25d06966e56abd66dba343e4e4f65c1501dd8bc95f290f9b711e.jpg) or click ![](images/cde23bbc3177ad966cf47b6a36582901b0d35a7f662471da0b8d8395b0541a27.jpg) on the configuration page, and then select Network Storage > FTP Parameters. Figure 6-116 FTP parameters ![](images/0289b101f76a67893531c1cec1039b971dd28de5a96bf63a8d70390e6e20c5bc.jpg) Step 2 Configure the parameters. Table 6-38 Parameters description
Parameters Description
Rate (Mbps)The maximum transmission speed of single FTP connection.
Connection Limit per IPThe allowed number of concurrent connections for each IP.
Max ConnectionThe allowed maximum number of connections.
Step 3 Click OK.

7 System Management

This chapter introduces system management operations including file management, maintenance, and task management.

7.1 File Management

This section introduces the management of tags, locked files and watermark.

7.1.1 Video Tag Management

Step 1 Click + , and then select FILE > Tag Management > Tag Management. Figure 7-1 Tag management ![](images/c9b2ef5546c8d31d351a19f19f926599ff060ae0a3c0473e0c055a666d25c29c.jpg) Step 2 Select a channel, set start time and end time, and then click Search. The tags during the set time period are displayed. - Click to view the corresponding video. - Click to edit the tag. - Click to delete the tag. - Select multiple tags and click Delete to delete the tags in batches. - Click Refresh to video the latest tags.

7.1.2 FILE LOCKED

View the locked video files, and you can unlock them. Step 1 Click + , and then select FILE > FILE LOCKED > FILE LOCKED. Figure 7-2 FILE LOCKED ![](images/c24254351fa1e3e3f07f5d1242a006f1839ea461eb08374c920aa148f69e56c7.jpg) Step 2 Select a channel, set start time and end time, and then click Search. The locked files are displayed. - Click ⓘ to view the video of the locked file. - Click Refresh to view the latest locked files. - Click 🔒 to unlock a file. - Select multiple files and click Unlock to unlock the files in batches.

7.1.3 Watermark Verification

Verify whether a video filed is tempered. Step 1 Click +, and then select FILE > Watermark > Watermark. Figure 7-3 Watermark ![](images/21bd4a5b58fb012a4501776942891e1413ccee0c565d792887cdc32dcda8bf4f.jpg) Step 2 Click Browse to select a video file. Step 3 Click Verify. \- Normal If the verification result is normal, the correct watermark is displayed. \- Exception If the verification result is abnormal, the abnormal watermark and its type are displayed.

7.2 Task Management

Configure intelligent analysis tasks for metadata of recorded videos. After the intelligent analysis task is completed, you can view the metadata video on the playback page. Step 1 Click +, and then select TASK. Figure 7-4 Task management ![](images/9feb93558c50714aec9d05363b3cde03945cde442a11ce8be725ab8d76c9bd43.jpg)

Step 2 Click Create.

![](images/4ad9810d21bc3b3da3eb65065efb77bd3c2b7da7e10fc2505094e1daf116f22a.jpg) In the device tree, indicates that the camera has been configured with intelligent analysis task. Figure 7-5 Create a task ![](images/0f2319f853c3070057b982fe708e4492f5da3404418266d22facd2d4f21ba0d8.jpg) Step 3 Select a channel from the resource tree. Step 4 Select a task type in the Task Type drop-down list. 1) Click the task type cell. The following dialogue box is displayed. Figure 7-6 Task type ![](images/8d909ffcdfc164da0604bed9b4a38b3ad47392f1e775c54d398634354a13645e.jpg) 2) Select a task type. Table 7-1 Task type description
Rule Name Operations
PeopleClick next to Enabled to enable human detection as well as face detection.Click next to Face to disable face detection.You can only enable face detection after human detection has been enabled.
VehicleClick to enable vehicle detection.
Non-Motor VehicleClick next to Enabled to enable non-motor vehicle detection as well as face detection.Click next to Face to disable face detection.You can only enable face detection after non-motor vehicle detection has been enabled.

3) Click OK.

![](images/d01d6c6ff4f44956dae3845f94e700f31f6b9370cbb3e3df664d1a5175206e82.jpg) Select multiple channels, click Unified Configuration, and then you can configure tasks in batches. Step 5 Select start time and end time. Step 6 Click Apply. After creating the tasks, you can perform the following operations. Table 7-2 Task operations
FunctionOperation
Click to start a task.
Click to delete a task.
Click to download the task video.
Click to play back video of the task.
Click to increase the priority of the task.
Click to lower the priority of the task.
StartSelect tasks, and then click Start to start the tasks in batches.
PauseSelect tasks, and then click Pause to pause the tasks in batches.
DeleteSelect tasks, and then click Delete to delete the tasks in batches.
Execution PeriodSelect one or more tasks, click Execution Period, and then select a time period. Tasks automatically run during this time period.

7.3 Backup

You can back up files to USB storage devices such as USB flash drive. Step 1 Click + , and then select BACKUP. Figure 7-7 Backup ![](images/d44c47f6a9824b5474361ab2d44e0a3c30b23e095b8a30a2b2eae3fb1677d0e5.jpg) Step 2 Select a channel from the resource tree on the left. Step 3 Select a file type. \- Record 1) Select record types including All, Video Detect, and IO Alarm. 2) Select a stream type including Main Stream and Sub Stream. 3) Set the time period. - Image 1) Select a snapshot type from IO Alarm and Video Detect., and then select detection type as needed. 2) Set the time period. Step 4 Click Search. Step 5 Select a searched file, and then click Remote Backup. Figure 7-8 Remote backup ![](images/627478c3fe4e6154cf3cdbaed1ad1bd44f91940a545e6401a0a0ccfb762583e7.jpg) Step 6 Click Query to search for connected third-party storage devices. Step 7 Select a storage device, and then in the Type box, select a target format for the file. Step 8 (Optional) Click Format to format the selected storage device. The formatting operation will clear all data of the storage device. Be cautious. Step 9 Click Start to start backing up the file. Step 10 (Optional) You can select a searched file, and then click Download to download it.

7.4 AI Report

Click +, select AI REPORT and then you can view in-area people counting report and queue people counting report. ![](images/5782ea0b23a1709d213c80444ecf087fb86b70c6d6b4dd1725591a0dfe121a02.jpg) When viewing the report of a camera, make sure that people counting rules hva been configured on it. For details, see "4.3 People Counting".

7.4.1 In-area People Counting Report

Step 1 Click + , select AI REPORT > AI REPORT> In Area People Counting Report. Figure 7-9 In-area people counting report ![](images/5d7776cd45c99c60ff6f62f6515c78bb66ac5a3b95682b5e44f90631a1b46650.jpg) Step 2 Select a device to be searched. You can only select AI fisheye camera. Step 3 Select a statistics type. \- People counting: Select People Counting, and then select the strand time (5 s, 30 s, 60 s). - Average strand time: The report shows the average strand time during different time periods. Step 4 Select a time period type from Daily, Monthly, and Yearly, and then set the corresponding date, month or year. Step 5 Click OK. Figure 7-10 People counting report ![](images/b1c4a7b6fe2a76ac9cb41e13ded4cd18adfe28753be3eae025c8dc349f7ea39c.jpg) Figure 7-11 Average strand time report ![](images/48e3feb272a89d40807b8d9f9063f80d5eff1f248108e980405720e1b7feeaad.jpg)
bar 2019-10-24Average Strand TimeDaily | Time | Area1 | Area2 | Area3 | Area4 | |---|---|---|---|---| | 07:00 | 11 | 17 | 18 | 0 | | 08:00 | 11 | 18 | 18 | 0 | | 09:00 | 11 | 18 | 18 | 0 | | 10:00 | 11 | 17 | 18 | 0 | | 11:00 | 11 | 18 | 18 | 0 | | 12:00 | 11 | 17 | 18 | 0 | | 13:00 | 11 | 18 | 18 | 0 | | 14:00 | 11 | 18 | 18 | 0 | The chart displays a grouped bar chart with three categories (Areas1, Area2, Area3) representing different strand times for each time point. The data is presented in a table format with columns for time and strand type. The 'Average Strand Time' value is annotated at the bottom right of the chart.
- Click ✅ Area1 ✅ Area2 ✅ Area3 ✅ Area4 to select the areas of which you need to view the reports. The ordinate of the report displays different areas in different colors, showing the number of people in different areas or the average strand time. - For people counting report, click Strand Time 5s 30s 60s to select a strand time. The report shows the people numbers of which the strand time is greater or less than the selected strand time. - Point to the report, and then the report shows the details at that time point. - Drag the gray scroll bar under the ordinate to view the statistics for different time periods. - Click ↻ to view the line chart. - Click 📂 to view the bar chart. - Click ↗ to export the report.

7.4.2 Queue People Counting Report

Step 1 Click + , and then select AI REPORT > AI REPORT > Queue People Counting. Figure 7-12 Queue people counting ![](images/799b81ca4983fb4c10516fbd8d5ab919492d3bca05c0bc086316e08cf42dc015.jpg) Step 2 Select a device to be searched. You can only select AI fisheye camera. Step 3 Select a queue time. Step 4 Select a time period type from Daily, Monthly, and Yearly, and then set the corresponding date, month or year. Step 5 Click OK. The report is displayed. Figure 7-13 Queuing people counting report ![](images/101f85f753915845d376efedf5640830ba32a816feadb37f4407e9b8123ca706.jpg) - The ordinate of the report displays different areas in different colors, showing the number of people in different areas or the average dwell time. - Point to the report, and then the report shows the details at that time point. - Drag the gray scroll bar under the ordinate to view the statistics for different time periods. - Click 📋 to view the line chart. - Click 📁 to view the bar chart.

8 System Maintenance

On the MAINTAIN page, you can operate and maintain the Device working environment to guarantee proper operation.

8.1 Overview

Select MAINTAIN > Overview. Figure 8-1 Overview ![](images/8e7a0ed3d1cd9aa95918828e8943f8ef836800a33d66b6fd84ba021ca62e0f7c.jpg) Table 8-1 Overview
No.Function Description
1OverviewView device version details and online users.ClickRefreshto refresh the data.
2Remote DeviceView the connection and idle status of remote devicesClick Jump To to go to theDEVICEpage for detailed information.ClickRefreshto refresh the data.
3RAID StatusView RAID status.Click Jump To to go to theSTORAGEpage for detailed information.ClickRefreshto refresh the data.
4Record StatusView recording status of remote devices.Click Jump To to go to theVIDEO RECORDINGpage for detailed information.ClickRefreshto refresh the data.
5Ethernet Card Status (Mbps)View NIC status.Click Jump To to go to theTCP/IPpage for detailed information.ClickRefreshto refresh the data.
No. Function Description
6 DiskDisplay the status of the front panel and rear panel.View status of disk, mainboard, and power.Disk statusindicates that the disk is online.indicates that the disk is abnormal.indicates a warning disk issue.indicates that disk is not connected.Power statusindicates that power is normal.indicates that power is abnormal.indicates that power is not connected.Mainboard statusindicates that mainboard is normal.indicates that mainboard is abnormal.indicates that mainboard is not connected.ClickDevice Positioning,and then the Device positioning indicator flashes. In this way, you can quickly find the Device.ClickRefreshto refresh the data.

8.2 System Information

You can view device information and legal information.

8.2.1 Viewing Device Information

View device information such as input bandwidth, system version, and web version. Click + on the LIVE page, and select MAINTAIN > System Info > Device Info. View device software license, privacy policy, and open-source software note. Click + on the LIVE page, and select MAINTAIN > System Info > Legal Info.

8.3 System Resources

Select MAINTAIN > System Resources > Device Resource, and then you can view resource status including CPU and memory usage, power status, cabinet temperature and fan speed. Figure 8-2 System resources
Detection ItemPositionTypeValue
MemoryMain Control Board Bay1Used Space/Total Space14.33GB/15.55GB
MemoryMain Control Board Bay2Used Space/Total Space13.16GB/15.55GB
CPUMain Control Board Bay1CPU Usage33%
CPUMain Control Board Bay2CPU Usage3%
CPUMain Control Board Bay1Temperature56℃
CPUMain Control Board Bay2Temperature56℃
PowerPower Port1Output Power370W
PowerPower Port2Output Power-
FanMain Control Board Bay1-1Fan Speed5640r/min
FanMain Control Board Bay1-2Fan Speed5640r/min
FanMain Control Board Bay1-3Fan Speed6720r/min
- Click ↗ to filter the search conditions. - Click Refresh to refresh the data.

8.4 Logs

The logs record all kinds of system running information. Check the log periodically and fix the problems in time to guarantee system proper operation.

Log Classification

Search for system log, user log, event log, and link log. Table 8-2 Log description
Log Type
System logSearch for system log.It includes logs of system running status, file management, hot spare, hardware detect and scheduled task.
User operation logSearch for user operation log.It includes user operation and user configuration log.
Event logSearch for alarm event log.It includes logs of area people counting, camera external alarm, call detection, cold spot, crowd distribution map, device offline, disk health exception, fan speed alarm, fire, hot sprot, IO alarm, IP conflict, IPC offline, lock in, low quota space, MAC conflict, no HDD, people counting, people stranding detection, power fault, queue people No. alarm, queue time alarm, SSD health exception, security exception, share service, smoking detection, storage error, storage full, storage pool error, tampering, temperature alarm (thermal), temperature contrast alarm, temperature (CPU), version exception, video frame loss, video motion, and RAID exception.
Link logSearch for device link log.You can search or export link log including user login/logout, session hijack, session blast and remote device.
The following steps are to search for system log. See the actual page for detailed information. Step 1 Select MAINTAIN > Log > System. Step 2 Set search criteria such as system log level, type and date. Step 3 Click Search. Figure 8-3 System log ![](images/53ae7ac72353170aee9e180fcb78e2860bdfd9ec50a8e7a3f79733c92e202627.jpg) Search for, export and clear log. Table 8-3 Log operation
Name Operation
Export logClick ↗ to export log information to local PC or USB storage device. You can select whether to encrypt the exported log information.
Clear logClick Clear all to clear all system logs.⚠️You will be unable to track the system error reason if you clear log.

8.5 Intelligent Diagnosis

8.5.1 Run Log

View system running logs for troubleshooting. ![](images/5858a757cb37dc5ecca3b2545b55d3c1efc7654302bed5c2c2a30e4b5a559552.jpg) Make sure that you have enabled Run Log in SECURITY > System Service. Otherwise there is no log data. Select MAINTAIN > Intelligent Diagnosis > Run Log. Figure 8-4 Logs
☐ (0) No.TypeFile NameOperate
☐ 1corecoredump/core-20191021142751@_IVSS2.000.000002.0.R_172.12.1.101_123456789012345.gz
☐ 2corecoredump/core-20191021001805@_IVSS2.000.000002.0.R_172.12.1.101_123456789012345.gz
☐ 3corecoredump/core-20191019220041@_IVSS2.000.000002.0.R_172.12.1.101_123456789012345.gz
- Click ↓ to export a log. • After selecting multiple logs, click Export to export them in batches.

8.5.2 One-click Export

Export the diagnosis data for troubleshooting when the Device is exception. Step 1 Select MAINTAIN > Intelligent Diagnosis > One-click Export. Figure 8-5 One-click export ![](images/3b85636439f8088903cc12e8232c75d23d2e99fc9aba93f161146523437ff43d.jpg) Step 2 Click Generate Diagnosis Data to generate diagnosis data. Step 3 Click Export to export the diagnosis result.

8.5.3 One-click Diagnosis

You can check the configuration and status of the Device through one-click diagnosis for better use of the Device. Step 1 Select MAINTAIN > Intelligent Diagnosis > One-click Diagnosis. Step 2 Click Diagnose. The results are displayed. Figure 8-6 Diagnosis results ![](images/2c7618e3622178e3c5d807cab8131d96f999e5cd2d88936fae4fb7e18ae09fae.jpg) Step 3 For each diagnosis item, click Details to view detailed information.

8.6 Network Care

8.6.1 Online User

Search for remote access network user information or you can block a user from access for a period of time. During the block period, the selected user cannot access the Device. ![](images/fd27bc2c7c0eb97a1d261fc984201caa8d06aa604cc412cf9d36eaaf4d708539.jpg) Cannot block yourself or block admin. Step 1 Select MAINTAIN > Network Care > Online User. ![](images/bca763d9810db1103875192db3344b0075b1001cc11c36454dce4282a3293c7e.jpg) The list displays the connected user information. Figure 8-7 Online user ![](images/08aac32e96328d9750b29ce85192334b187852309835d726b2f31ef2a6664da5.jpg)

Step 2 Block user.

- Block: Click ⬤ corresponding to the user. - Batch block: Select multiple users you want to block and then click Block. Figure 8-8 Block ![](images/3535abb019c9a8947ab781b551c0357ceb50a3c7d6c2b42bfc75a3fe841aeb9b.jpg) Step 3 Set block period. The default period is 30 minutes. Step 4 Click OK to save the configuration.

8.6.2 Packet Capture

Packet capture is the practice of intercepting a data packet that is crossing or moving over a specific computer network. The captured packet is stored temporarily for analysis. The packet is inspected to help diagnose and solve network problems and determine whether its structure follows network security policies. Step 1 On the LIVE page, click and select MAINTAIN > Network Care > Packet Capture. Figure 8-9 Packet capture ![](images/c9a0c8e30564dcf54c2fe383ffea093b45f10fea02228b2770490da915840256.jpg) Step 2 In the Network Test section, enter the target address, and then clickTest. After testing is completed, the test result is displayed. You can check the evaluation for average delay, packet loss, and network status. Step 3 (Optional) When operating on the local interface, connect a USB storage device to the Device, select the USB device, and then click Browse to select the saving path. Step 4 In the Packet Capture section, click to start capturing the packets of the corresponding NIC, and then click to stop. ![](images/ef6418f26cb8310f54677d0de4a5c4b95708ba01a082533fcd86ff0a74c665ac.jpg) \- You cannot capture packets of several NICs at the same time. \- During packet capturing, you can go to other pages for operation and go back to the Packet Capture page later to stop packet capturing. Step 5 (Optional) When operating on the web or PCAPP, click ↓ to download the captured packet.

8.7 Device Maintenance

Device maintenance is to reboot device, restore factory default setup, or upgrade system and so on. Clear the malfunction or error during the system operation and enhance device running performance.

8.7.1 Upgrading Device

Upgrade the system version.

8.7.1.1 Upgrading the Device

Import the upgrade file to upgrade device version. The upgrade file extension name shall be .bin. ![](images/d3857905077b0dd8ae297e71f47447d5f3d407140b4ae61d3963c65d226e5e3c.jpg) - During upgrading, do not disconnect from power and network, and reboot or shut down the Device. • Make sure that the upgrade file is correct. Improper upgrade file might result in device error! Step 1 Select MAINTAIN > Device Maintain > Update > Host. Figure 8-10 Upgrade host ![](images/1e4a7f552095b1c17245e94fd99927e3830e1c8de142312baeabfee418a7b561.jpg) Step 2 Click Browse to select an upgrade file. Step 3 Click Upgrade Now. Step 4 Click OK. The system starts upgrading. Device automatically reboots after successfully upgraded.

8.7.1.2 Upgrading Cameras

Import the upgrade file to upgrade a camera. ![](images/75bcf145a31be4eac8acaa08efde1298dc49ee5ab624ee4a452d6a47f200c333.jpg) Make sure that you have got the upgrade file and placed it in the correct directory. Step 1 Select MAINTAIN > Device Maintain > Update > Camera Update. Step 2 Select a camera, and then click File upgrade. ![](images/f574bd23ddafdcb2f7872c3607c901d5626ebaf18bb04574b12666743757457a.jpg) Stop recording on the camera first; otherwise the upgrade might fail. Figure 8-11 Upgrade ![](images/e38f5691dd43ce8636c48327cad1a7da99d72fe9c1ca86b86b672bb38b8f792b.jpg) Step 3 Click Browse to select an upgrade file. Step 4 Click Upgrade Now.

8.7.2 Default

When the system runs slowly and has configuration errors, try to solve the problems by restoring the default settings. ![](images/990671c05c9db1fb2edf4ec397d4d1d30b059f73a39a590485744c24426ab5b3.jpg) All configurations are lost after factory default operation. Step 1 Select MAINTAIN > Device Maintain > Default. Figure 8-12 Default ![](images/be4c9fcacc8a3fa858d854e6c72c91af4d0643c5bfbf7cda958c2aa8cdc73ab6.jpg) Step 2 Select a method. \- Click Default. Figure 8-13 Prompt (1) ![](images/f96391188b857fa83f606339a96ee5ad0f477754ec7f11dfea333d0d3b242853.jpg) \- Click Factory Default. Figure 8-14 Prompt (2) ![](images/3163d319870515b2499320d70849c66b6a8b730c05243b0747ca13117d5d32d1.jpg) Step 3 Click OK. System begins to restore default settings. After successfully restored default settings, system prompts to restart the Device.

8.7.3 Automatic Maintenance

If the Device has run for a long time, you can set to automatically reboot the Device at idle time. Step 1 Select MAINTAIN > Device Maintain > Auto Maintain. Figure 8-15 Auto Maintain ![](images/bbe08a01b64e5e8f9caa6b0bebae93626786806c6b5e3f88da43acad243aabd9.jpg) Step 2 Set auto reboot time and. Step 3 Enable Emergency Maintenance. When the Device has an upgrade power outage, running error and other problems, and you cannot log in, you can enable Emergency Maintenance to restart, clear configuration, and upgrade. Step 4 Click Save. Figure 8-16 Emergency maintenance ![](images/c62577365eef612defdd2f02e1a47124c594cbcf3156551df83a505f0a7c7092.jpg)

8.7.4 IMP/EXP

Export device configuration file to local PC or USB storage device, to backup it. When the configuration is lost due to abnormal operation, import the backup configuration file to restore system configurations quickly. Select MAINTAIN > Device Maintain > IMP/EXP. Figure 8-17 IMP/EXP ![](images/91cc985d543e6725546a67770d05e3d0c35712fef892f085b993d675156ea472.jpg)

Export Configuration File

Click Export to export configuration file to local PC or USB storage device. File path might vary depending on interface operations. - On PCAPP, click ≡, and then select Download content to view file saving path. For details, see "9.3 Viewing Downloads". ● During web operations, files are saved under default downloading path of the browser.

Import Configuration File

Step 1 Click Browse to select the configuration file. Step 2 Click Import. After the configuration file is imported successfully, the Device will reboot automatically.

8.8 Disk Maintenance

Check the status of HDD to handle exceptions in time.

8.8.1 S.M.A.R.T Detection

Run S.M.A.R.T detection on the storage devices. Step 1 Select MAINTAIN > Disk Maintenance > S.M.A.R.T Detection. Figure 8-18 S.M.A.R.T Detection ![](images/84f5dbb3e45eee4aa6a5592676e2601bbdbbc883d251ffd1ee6e776aee2974f6.jpg) Step 2 Set the detection period. Step 3 Click OK.

8.8.2 Health Monitoring

Select MAINTAIN > Disk Maintenance > Health Monitoring, and then you can view the status of external HDD. ![](images/f08b92f3e42320990f9a8996727d3df152a98b75ea4a5af49baaa5ca9c3f7419.jpg) The function only supports HDDs provided by Dahua.

8.8.3 SSD Health Detection

On the LIVE page, click 📋nd select MAINTAIN> Disk Maintenance >SSD Health Detection, and then you can view the storage allocation and remaining P/E cycle of SSD. Figure 8-19 SSD health detection ![](images/76a6199723c40fbde8a177edc1fae10c074db6652f71e062cc8023646922e648.jpg)
pie | Category | Percentage (%) | | :--- | :--- | | History Snapshot Database - OKB | 0.0 | | Other | 1.59GB | | Idle | 115.65GB | | Remaining P/E Cycle | Percentage (A) | | 2022-03 | 100 | | 2022-04 | 72 |

8.8.4 Firmware Update

Import update file to update HDD. Step 1 Select MAINTAIN > Disk Maintenance > Firmware update. Figure 8-20 Firmware update ![](images/47a2164dd0346b95a0cbbd58dc3d82625454872d1e6ad8513deae1325f3b3388.jpg) Step 2 Click Download Template to download update template. Step 3 Click , select Download, and then open and fill in the downloaded template. Step 4 Select an HDD, click Import Firmware Info, click Browse to choose the template to be imported, and then click Import. Step 5 Click Firmware Update to update firmware information.

9 PCAPP Introduction

After installing PCAPP, system supports to access the Device remotely to carry out system configuration, function operations and system maintenance. ![](images/3a1b8f76e3882050fd460bbd406cf3e2d774569e6400db9b5f36b02f54708381.jpg) For details about installing PCAPP, see "3.3.1 Logging in to PCAPP Client".

9.1 Page Description

Double-click on the PC desktop. System displays PCAPP at full screen by default. Click to display the task column. Figure 9-1 EVS task column ![](images/f0e1f50fb4a6fc4a5083c65baf6eb27390c269c55f8e28b2a201dfd96d8665ee.jpg) Table 9-1 Icons
Icons Description
PCAPP | Please Enter URLAddress bar: Enter the IP address of remote device.
Enter device IP address and then click the button to go to the login page.Now the icon turns into ⬤. Click to refresh the page.
Click to view history login record, view downloads, set compatibility mode and view EVS version information.
-Click to minimize PCAPP.
Click to maximize PCAPP.
Click to display PCAPP at full screen.
×Click to close PCAPP.

9.2 History Record

Click ≡, and then select History. The History page is displayed. See Figure 9-2. You can view history access record and clear buffer. - Click Clear History to clear all history records. - Click Clear Buffer to clear buffer data, and reboot PCAPP. Figure 9-2 History record ![](images/491b699389386bc70e28868563f02e735ff2d0119ce72e45f4b663eb1c76515b.jpg)

9.3 Viewing Downloads

To view and clear history downloads, click ≡, and then select Download. The Downloads page is displayed. See Figure 9-3. • Double-click file name to open it. - Click Displayed in Folder to open the folder where the file is located. - Click Clear Downloads to clear history download records. Figure 9-3 Downloads ![](images/847c128a5ac09ce932f11c513cf59a65ee8b77124e6f5eb2078aa92efebf4f67.jpg)

9.4 Configuring PCAPP

When PC theme is not Areo, video of PCAPP might not be displayed normally. It is suggested that PC theme should be switched to Areo, or compatibility mode of PCAPP should be enabled.

Switching PC Theme

![](images/b866af5fd826df4eea1082f5bf52dc4e8d28677ef14b0afc29a3990d241e393a.jpg) This section uses Windows 7 as an example. Right-click any blank position on PC desktop, select Personalize, and then switch to Aero theme. See Figure 9-4. Restart the PCAPP before the Aero theme takes effect. Figure 9-4 PC theme ![](images/1359e859cad7f7c3f13cea0edaedc23b2158f269c3cf316b79c63c53305540fc.jpg)

Enabling Compatibility Mode

Click ≡, and select Settings. The Settings page is displayed. Select Compatibility Mode. Restart PCAPP before the compatibility mode takes effect. Figure 9-5 Setting ![](images/53e856607e254505e512002ee07529efd66544b93f642a6f5e1a6177b939745a.jpg)

Enabling Hardware Acceleration

Click ≡, and select Settings. The Settings page is displayed. Select Enable hardware acceleration (it will take effect after video is opened again). The live view becomes much more fluent when this function is enabled.

9.5 Viewing Version Details

Click ≡ and then select About. The About page is displayed. View PCAPP version information. Figure 9-6 About ![](images/899c45685f01d87a39ce8751f4770bbaca3c8acabe3db0506e30bd7f57199fdf.jpg)

10 Log Out, Reboot, Shut Down, Lock

Log out, reboot, shut down and lock out the Device. Figure 10-1 User operation ![](images/7d349011b4ccff0305f15c132792e8c0ba34d4e7e233c0b290adfc62baf61219.jpg) Log Out Click ![](images/9729a94737f3d1d9c3c4dfb9251fcb1598850f2d18ddd1069557ae4ab8d808da.jpg) , and then select Log Out. Reboot Click ![](images/9bbe12297f2491127ee91ee78a922a73887e8faa597a180e911ca86ed7e56613.jpg) , and then select Reboot. System pops up confirm dialogue box. Click OK to reboot. Shut Down ![](images/372f510498acba7bb0a792eaa821ecfd4c5882e1d99c783c24bdddfa4240798e.jpg) Unplugging the power cable might result in data (record and image) loss. - Mode 1 (recommended): Click 📄, and then select Shutdown. System pops up confirm dialogue box and then click OK to shut down. - Mode 2: Use power on-off button on the Device. ◇ 8-HDD series product: Press power on-off button on rear panel. ◇ Other series products: Press the power on-off button on the Device for at least 4 seconds. • Mode 3: Unplug the power cable. Lock Click ![](images/477faf77f536c22f2c095b38d180ace5b77c3304e71d778eccac9e05aec7af40.jpg) , and then select Lock to lock the client. The locked client cannot be operated. To unlock the client, click anywhere on the client, and then the Unlock dialogue box is displayed. Enter the username and password, and then click OK. You can also click Switch User to switch to another user account. Figure 10-2 Unlock the client ![](images/31dfd86d608d4b5a843e681a1f45af6470987450a72463589ed09ed1266f4e4a.jpg)

Appendix 1 Particulate and Gaseous Contamination Specifications

Appendix 1.1 Particulate Contamination Specifications

The following table defines the limitations of the particulate contamination in the operating environment of the device. If the level of particulate contamination exceeds the specified limitations and result in device damage or failure, you need to rectify the environmental conditions. Appendix Table 1-1 Particulate contamination specifications
Particulate contaminationSpecifications
Air filtration Class 8 as defined by ISO 14644-1.
Conductive dustAir must be free of conductive dust, zinc whiskers, or other conductive particles.
Corrosive dustAir must be free of corrosive dust. Residual dust present in the air must have a deliquescent point less than 60% relative humidity.
Appendix Table 1-2 ISO 14644-1 cleanroom classification
Class Maximum particles/m ^3
-≥ 0.1 μm≥ 0.2 μm≥ 0.3 μm≥ 0.5 μm≥ 1 μm≥ 5 μm
Class 1 10 2- - - -
Class 210024104--
Class 31000237102358-
Class 4100002370102035283-
Class 51000002370010200352083229
Class 61000000237000102000352008320293
Class 7---352000832002930
Class 8---352000083200029300
Class 9----8320000293000

Appendix 1.2 Gaseous Contamination Specifications

Usually indoor and outdoor atmospheric environments contain a small amount of common corrosive gas pollutants. When these mixed or single corrosive gas pollutants react with other environmental factors such as temperature or relative humidity in the long term, the device might suffer from a risk of corrosion and failure. The following table defines the limitations of the gaseous contamination in the operating environment of the device. Appendix Table 1-3 Gaseous contamination specifications
Gaseous contamination Specifications
Copper coupon corrosion rate< 300 Å/month per Class G1 as defined by ANSI/ISA71.04-2013
Silver coupon corrosion rate< 200Å/month per Class G1 as defined by ANSI/ISA71.04-2013
Appendix Table 1-4 ANSI/ISA-71.04-2013 classification of reactive environments
Class CopperReactivitySilver ReactivityDescription
G1 (mild)< 300 Å/month< 200 Å/monthCorrosion is not a factor in determining equipment reliability.
G2 (moderate)< 1000 Å/month< 1000 Å/monthCorrosion effects are measurable and corrosion might be a factor.
G3 (harsh)< 2000 Å/month< 2000 Å/monthHigh probability that corrosive attack will occur.
GX (severe)≥ 2000 Å/month≥ 2000 Å/monthOnly specially designed and packaged devices are expected to survive.

Appendix 2 RAID

RAID is an abbreviation of Redundant Array of Independent Disks. It combines several independent HDDs (physical HDD) to form a HDD group (logic HDD) to provide more storage capacity and data redundancy.

RAID Level

RAID level refers to the way that the disk array is organized. Different RAID levels have different data protection, availability and performance. Appendix Table 2-1 RAID level
RAID LevelDescriptionMin. HDD Needed
RAID 0RAID 0 is called striping.RAID 0 is to save the continued data fragmentation on several HDDs. It can process the read and write at the same time, so its read/write speed is N (N refers to the HDD amount of the RAID 0) times as many as one HDD. RAID 0 does not have data redundant, so one HDD damage might result in data loss that cannot be restored.2
RAID 1It is also called mirror or mirroring.RAID 1 data is written to two HDDs equally, which guarantee the system reliability and can be repaired. RAID 1 read speed is almost close to the total volume of all HDDs. The write speed is limited by the slowest HDD. At the same time, the RAID 1 has the lowest HDD usage rate. It is only 50%.2
RAID 5RAID 5 is to save the data and the corresponding odd/even verification information to each HDD of the RAID 5 group and save the verification information and corresponding data to different HDDs. When one HDD of the RAID 5 is damaged, system can use the rest data and corresponding verification information to restore the damaged data. It does not affect data integrity.3
RAID 6Based on the RAID 5, RAID 6 adds one odd/even verification HDD. The two independent odd/even systems adopt different algorithm, the data reliability is very high. Even two HDDs are broken at the same time, there is no data loss risk. Comparing to RAID 5, the RAID 6 needs to allocate larger HDD space for odd/even verification information, so its read/write is even worse.4
RAID 10RAID 10 is a combination of the RAID 1 and RAID 0. It uses the extra high speed efficient of the RAID 0 and high data protection and restores capability of the RAID 1. It has high read/write performance and security. However, the RAID 10 HDD usage efficiency is as low as RAID 1.4
RAID 50RAID50 is a combination of the RAID5 and RAID0. It has higher fault-tolerance. There is no data loss even one HDD in the set malfunctions.6
RAID 60RAID60 is a combination of the RAID6 and RAID0. It has higher fault-tolerance and read performance. There is no data loss even two HDDs in one set malfunctions.8
SRAIDBased on RAID 5, SRAID, or super RAID, features quick synchronization, reconstructuring while writing, partial reconstruction, reconstruction without restart and so on. SRAID promises higher security and and better performance.3
JRAIDJRAID adopts erasure coding and has higher storage redundancy than RAID 5 and RAID 6. With up to eight redundant disks, JRAID features higher security.3

RAID Capacity

See the sheet for RAID space information. Capacity N refers to the mini HDD amount to create the corresponding RAID. Appendix Table 2-2 RAID capacity
RAID Level TotalSpace of the N HDD
JRAID(N-2) × min (capacityN)
SRAID(N-1)× min (capacityN)
RAID0The total amount of current RAID group
RAID1Min (capacityN)
RAID5(N-1) × min (capacityN)
RAID6(N-2) × min (capacityN)
RAID10(N/2) × min (capacityN)
RAID50(N-2) × min (capacityN)
RAID60(N-4) × min (capacityN)
Appendix 3 Glossary
FTPFile Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a protocol of the TCP/IP protocol group. It transfers file from one PC to another, without consideration of the location, connection type, and operation system of the PC.
iSCSIInternet Small Computer System Interface (iSCSI) is an internet protocol standard in Ethernet, and an SCSI instruction set for hardware to be used in IP protocol layer. Briefly, iSCSI can realize SCSI protocol in the IP network, so router option is available in high-speed 1000M Ethernet.
LANLocal Area Network (LAN) is a computer network that interconnects computers within a limited area (such as an office building or a school).
NFSNetwork File System (NFS) is a distributed file system protocol. It allows a client computer to access files or peripheral devices of another PC. It is mainly used in UNIX-like platforms.
MTUMaximum Transmission Unit (MTU) is the size of the largest protocol data unit that can be communicated in a single network layer transaction.
SAMBAIt is a free software that can realize Server Messages Block (SMB) on Linux and Unix systems. It consists of server and client.
SATASerial Advanced Technology Attachment (SATA) is a serial HDD interface that can realize serial data transmission. The current released Serial ATA 2.0 enjoys maximum theoretical transfer speed of 300MB/s.
SATA HDDHDD that adopts SATA standard. Some leading manufacturers such as Seagate, Western Digital, and Hitachi are offering SATA HDDs.
SMARTSelf-Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology (SMART) is an automatic monitoring and alarming system of HDD status. It monitors and records the HDD through monitoring instructions in the HDD, and compares the monitoring results with the pre-defined security value of the manufacturer. If the monitoring situation is about to exceed or already exceeded the pre-defined value, an alarm will be triggered, and small-scale repair will be initiated. This helps ensure the security of HDD data.
TCPTransmission Control Protocol (TCP) is a transmission-layer communication protocol that provides reliable and ordered delivery of a stream of bytes.
UDPUser Datagram Protocol (UDP) is a connectionless communication protocol used for processing data packets.
WANWide Area Network (WAN) is a computer network that extends over a large geographical distance. It connects physically disparate LANs and computer systems for the purpose of resource sharing.
Storage PoolIt is a virtual logic device. It can consist of several HDDs and RAID groups. It is a main way to realize virtual storage.
SynchronizationAfter creating RAID1 or RAID5, and before using it, the system needs to read and write the HDD at a fixed speed and adopts an algorithm to calculate. This process is called synchronization. During synchronization, the system performance speed is very low.
Shared DirectoryLocal PC access the top path of the shared storage space. You can create, remove, authenticate and set valid user at the storage device. User is only allowed to operate folder and file performance in the under-layer. According to different share protocols, it can be divided into SAMBA share folder, NFS share folder and FTP share folder.
Working StatusIt is for RAID6/RAID5/RAID1. It is the RAID status after it completes synchronization operation. When the RAID group is in working status, on the Storage > RAID interface, the RAID device status is "clean".
Degraded StatusIt is a status after you remove one disk from RAID1/RAID5 (working status) or remove two disks from RAID6. The status shows "degraded".
Manageable StatusIt is a device status when controller configure device by web. Actually, when there is no error or damage, the Device shall always be in manageable status.
Ready StatusIt is a device status when controller access HDD by network. The system is ready to use after you configure correctly in accordance with the Manual. Some non-device error (such as configuration error, hot swap error) might result in device failure. You can configure again to boot up the Device. But data loss might occur during this process.

Appendix 4 Cybersecurity Recommendations

Cybersecurity is more than just a buzzword: it's something that pertains to every device that is connected to the internet. IP video surveillance is not immune to cyber risks, but taking basic steps toward protecting and strengthening networks and networked appliances will make them less susceptible to attacks. Below are some tips and recommendations from Dahua on how to create a more secured security system.

Mandatory actions to be taken for basic device network security:

1. Use Strong Passwords

Please refer to the following suggestions to set passwords. ● The length should not be less than 8 characters. - Include at least two types of characters; character types include upper and lower case letters, numbers and symbols. - Do not contain the account name or the account name in reverse order. - Do not use continuous characters, such as 123, abc, etc. - Do not use overlapped characters, such as 111, aaa, etc.

2. Update Firmware and Client Software in Time

- According to the standard procedure in Tech-industry, we recommend to keep your device (such as NVR, DVR, IP camera, etc.) firmware up-to-date to ensure the system is equipped with the latest security patches and fixes. When the device is connected to the public network, it is recommended to enable the “auto-check for updates” function to obtain timely information of firmware updates released by the manufacturer. - We suggest that you download and use the latest version of client software.

"Nice to have" recommendations to improve your device network security:

1. Physical Protection

We suggest that you perform physical protection to device, especially storage devices. For example, place the device in a special computer room and cabinet, and implement well-done access control permission and key management to prevent unauthorized personnel from carrying out physical contacts such as damaging hardware, unauthorized connection of removable device (such as USB flash disk, serial port), etc.

2. Change Passwords Regularly

We suggest that you change passwords regularly to reduce the risk of being guessed or cracked.

3. Set and Update Passwords Reset Information Timely

The device supports password reset function. Please set up related information for password reset in time, including the end user's mailbox and password protection questions. If the information changes, please modify it in time. When setting password protection questions, it is suggested not to use those that can be easily guessed.

4. Enable Account Lock

The account lock feature is enabled by default, and We recommend you keep it on to guarantee the account security. If an attacker attempts to log in with the wrong password several times, the corresponding account and the source IP address will be locked.

5. Change Default HTTP and Other Service Ports

We suggest you to change default HTTP and other service ports into any set of numbers between 1024–65535, reducing the risk of outsiders being able to guess which ports you are using.

6. Enable HTTPS

We suggest you to enable HTTPS, so that you visit Web service through a secure communication channel.

7. MAC Address Binding

We recommend you bind the IP and MAC address of the gateway to the device, thus reducing the risk of ARP spoofing.

8. Assign Accounts and Privileges Reasonably

According to business and management requirements, reasonably add users and assign a minimum set of permissions to them.

9. Disable Unnecessary Services and Choose Secure Modes

If not needed, it is recommended to turn off some services such as SNMP, SMTP, UPnP, etc., to reduce risks. If necessary, it is highly recommended that you use safe modes, including but not limited to the following services: - SNMP: Choose SNMP v3, and set up strong encryption passwords and authentication passwords. - SMTP: Choose TLS to access mailbox server. - FTP: Choose SFTP, and set up strong passwords. ● AP hotspot: Choose WPA2-PSK encryption mode, and set up strong passwords.

10. Audio and Video Encrypted Transmission

If your audio and video data contents are very important or sensitive, we recommend that you use encrypted transmission function, to reduce the risk of audio and video data being stolen during transmission. Reminder: encrypted transmission will cause some loss in transmission efficiency.

11. Secure Auditing

- Check online users: we suggest that you check online users regularly to see if the device is logged in without authorization. - Check device log: By viewing the logs, you can know the IP addresses that were used to log in to your devices and their key operations.

12. Network Log

Due to the limited storage capacity of the device, the stored log is limited. If you need to save the log for a long time, it is recommended that you enable the network log function to ensure that the critical logs are synchronized to the network log server for tracing.

13. Construct a Safe Network Environment

In order to better ensure the safety of device and reduce potential cyber risks, we recommend: - Disable the port mapping function of the router to avoid direct access to the intranet devices from external network. - The network should be partitioned and isolated according to the actual network needs. If there are no communication requirements between two sub networks, it is suggested to use VLAN, network GAP and other technologies to partition the network, so as to achieve the network isolation effect. - Establish the 802.1x access authentication system to reduce the risk of unauthorized access to private networks. \- Enable IP/MAC address filtering function to limit the range of hosts allowed to access the device.

More information

Please visit Dahua official website security emergency response center for security announcements and the latest security recommendations.

ENABLING A SAFER SOCIETY AND SMARTER LIVING

Table of contents Click a title to access it
Manual assistant
Powered by Anthropic
Waiting for your message
Product information

Brand : Dahua Technology

Model : EVS7124D-V2

Category : Server